2019 PATHFINDER

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

 CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- warnings, cautions and instructions con- Before driving your vehicle, please read this
derstand the operation and maintenance cerning proper use of such accessories Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- familiarity with controls and maintenance
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. cessory. It is recommended that you visit a requirements, assisting you in the safe op-
Please read through this manual before NISSAN dealer for details concerning the eration of your vehicle.
operating your vehicle. particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. WARNING
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance REMINDERS!
and schedules” section of this manual Follow these important driving rules to
explains details about maintaining and help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a for you and your passengers!
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- cohol or drugs.
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
der your state’s lemon law. and never drive too fast for
conditions.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
assist you with the extensive resources driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
available to them. tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
additional accessories installed prior to de- propriate child restraint systems. Pre-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a teen children should be seated in the
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the rear seat.
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
∙ ALWAYS provide information about For additional information, refer to WARNING
the proper use of vehicle safety fea- “On-pavement and off-road driving Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. precautions”, “Avoiding collision and agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual rollover” and “Driving safety precau- the port during normal driving, for ex-
for important safety information. tions” in the “Starting and driving” ample remote insurance company
section of this manual. monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive telematics or engine reprogramming,
models, a 4WD mark is placed at the begin- MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE may cause interference or damage to
ning of the applicable sections/items. This vehicle should not be modified. vehicle systems. We do not recommend
As with other vehicles with features for Modification could affect its or endorse the use of any aftermarket
off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel performance, safety, emissions or du- OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
drive models correctly may result in loss rability and may even violate govern- approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-
ranty may not cover damage caused by
of control or an accident. For additional mental regulations. In addition, dam-
any aftermarket plug-in device.
information, refer to “Driving safety pre- age or performance problems
cautions” in the “Starting and driving” resulting from modifications may not
section of this manual. be covered under NISSAN warranties.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passen-
ger car because it has a higher center
of gravity for off-road use. As with
other vehicles with features of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all sumer Affairs. Refer to NISSAN CUSTOMER
features and equipment available on this CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s
model. Features and equipment in your ve- Manual for contact information.
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore, THIS MANUAL
you may find information about features or You will see various symbols in this manual.
equipment that are not included or in- They are used in the following ways:
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
WARNING
tions in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or seri-
right to change specifications, perfor- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce
mance, design or component suppliers the risk, the procedures must be fol- APD1005
without notice and without obligation. lowed precisely.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
From time to time, NISSAN may update or this” or “Do not let this happen.”
revise this manual to provide Owners with CAUTION
the most accurate information currently This is used to indicate the presence of
available. Please carefully read and retain a hazard that could cause minor or If you see a symbol similar to these in an
with this manual all revision updates sent moderate personal injury or damage to illustration, it means the arrow points to
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the front of the vehicle.
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- the procedures must be followed
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- carefully.
sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
section of the NISSAN website at these indicate movement or action.
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illus-
tration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
© 2019 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan North America, Inc.
 NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at:
you would like to provide NISSAN directly For U.S. customers
– Your name, address, and telephone
with comments or questions, please con- Nissan North America, Inc.
number
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department
ment using our toll-free number: – Vehicle identification number (attached P.O. Box 685003
to the top of the instrument panel on the Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
driver’s side) or via e-mail at:
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261) – Date of purchase [email protected]
For Canadian customers
For Canadian customers – Current odometer reading
Nissan Canada Inc.
1-800-387-0122
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
– Your comments or questions or via e-mail at:
OR [email protected]
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0

Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11
0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)

2. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-12)
5. Seat belts with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-18, 1-53)
6. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-53)
8. Seats (P. 1-2)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) (P. 1-30)
11. Second row seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of
seatback) (P. 1-30)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2466

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-32)
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
4. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)
5. Power windows (P. 2-65)
6. Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-2)
Keys (P. 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-45)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-27)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-39)
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (P. 2-39)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2560

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear window wiper and washer

switch (P. 2-36)
2. Towing (P. 10-18)
3. Liftgate release (P. 3-32)
Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11)
4. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-79)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-39)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-39)
7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2561

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Glove box (P. 2-57)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-43)
3. Map lights (P. 2-71)
4. Power moonroof (if so equipped)
(P. 2-68)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-57)
6. Cup holders (P. 2-57)
7. Console box (P. 2-57)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2458

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vents (P. 4-31)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-39)
3. Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-42)
4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-53)
Horn (P. 2-43)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-11)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)
6. Twin trip odometer reset switch
(P. 2-5)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (P. 2-36)
8. Control panel*
9. Center display*
Navigation system*
(if so equipped)
10. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-53)
11. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-53)
12. Glove box (P. 2-57)
13. Automatic heater and air
conditioning controls (P. 4-32)
LII2409

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

14. Audio system controls* *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
15. Hazard warning flasher switch Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
(P. 6-2) Refer to the page number indicated in
16. Push-button ignition switch parenthesis for operating details.
(P. 5-11)
17. Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)
18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-42)
19. Control panel and vehicle informa-
tion display switches (P. 2-20)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
20. Hood release (P. 3-32)
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-48)
TOW mode switch (P. 2-53)
Liftgate instrument panel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-32)
Warning systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

VQ35DD engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)
2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
3. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
4. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
8. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
9. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)
10. Battery (P. 8-13)
11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
12. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI3291

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page

light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-12 Power steering 2-15 Hill descent con- 2-16
System (ABS) warning light trol system ON
or warning light indicator light (if
Seat belt warning 2-15 so equipped)
light and chime
Malfunction Indi- 2-17
Automatic Emer- 2-12 Supplemental air 2-16 cator Light (MIL)
gency Braking bag warning light
(AEB) system Overdrive OFF 2-18
warning light Indicator Name Page indicator light
light
Brake warning 2-12 Security indicator 2-18
light Front fog light in- 2-16 light
or dicator light (if so
equipped) Side light and 2-18
headlight indica-
Front passenger 2-16 tor light (green)
air bag status
Charge warning 2-13
light Slip indicator light 2-18
light
High beam indi- 2-16
Low tire pressure 2-13 cator light (blue) TOW mode ON 2-18
warning light
indicator light
Master warning 2-15
light

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

 Indicator Name Page
light

Turn signal/ 2-18

hazard indicator
lights

Vehicle Dynamic 2-18

Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

MEMO

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Front manual seat adjustment Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Three-point type seat belt with
Front power seat adjustment retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Adjustable head restraint/headrest Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Non-adjustable head restraint/ LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Removable (without Dual Head using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Mobile Rear-facing child restraint installation
Entertainment System (MES) only) . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Forward-facing child restraint
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Folding head restraint/headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Forward-facing child restraint
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-72
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . 1-71
SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
ARS1152 hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
WARNING ∙ For the most effective protection cant risk of injury or death to people
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat and pets.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
should be upright. Always sit well
the seatback is reclined. This can be ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
back and upright in the seat with both
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not driving so full attention may be given
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
be against your body. In an accident, to vehicle operation. The seat may
properly. For additional information,
you could be thrown into it and re- move suddenly and could cause loss
refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
ceive neck or other serious injuries. of control of the vehicle.
age” in this section.
You could also slide under the lap belt
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
any more than needed for comfort.
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.

LRS2160 LRS2161
Forward and backward Reclining
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

 LRS2202 LRS2132
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to The lumbar support feature provides ad-
adjust the seat height until the desired po- justable lower back support to the driver.
sition is achieved. Move the lever up or down to adjust the
seat lumbar area.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).

LRS2662
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT For additional information, refer to “Auto-
(if so equipped) matic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
Operating tips manual.

∙ The power seat motor has an auto- Forward and backward

reset overload protection circuit. If the Moving the switch as shown will slide the
motor stops during operation, wait seat forward or backward to the desired
30 seconds then reactivate the switch. position.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the en-
gine is off. This will discharge the bat-
tery.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

 LRS2636 LRS2132 LRS2270
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Manual (if so equipped) Power (if so equipped)
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle and height of the seat cushion. The lumbar support feature provides ad-
justable lower back support to the driver.
Move the lever as shown (manual) or push
the switch as shown (power) to adjust the
seat lumbar area.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 Reclining ∙ For the most effective protection
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
䊊2 and lean back. To bring the seatback should be upright. Always sit well
forward, pull the lever 䊊
2 up and lean your back and upright in the seat and ad-
just the seat belt properly. For addi-
body forward. Release the lever to lock the
tional information, refer to “Precau-
seatback in position.
tions on seat belt usage” in this
The recline feature allows adjustment of section.
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
LRS2143 be reclined to allow occupants to rest
Outboard seats when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT WARNING
Forward and backward ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
Pull the center of the bar 䊊1 up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or back- ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
ward to the desired position. Release the the seatback is reclined. This can be
bar to lock the seat in position. dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

 Multi-mode Slide the entire seat forward for access to
the 3rd row.
WARNING
To return the seat to a locked position,
When returning the seat to its original push the upper seatback rearward until
position, confirm that the seat and the seatback and tracks are locked. Push
seatback are locked properly. the seat cushion down.

CAUTION Child seat access mode

∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat
foot or bump your head when operat- can be slid forward for easy entry or exit
ing the walk-in seat. from the 3rd row bench seat without a child
safety seat being removed.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat
tipped up. To enter the 3rd row from outside the ve-
LRS2142
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row hicle, lift up on the seatback lever located
One touch walk-in function seat to pinch, hit any part of your body on the upper outboard side of the seat-
or other people when operating the back on the 2nd row bench seat. This will
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside
2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path release the seatback. Then tilt the seat and
the vehicle by using the seatback release
is clear of all objects before moving release the tracks so you will be able to
lever located on the upper outboard side of
the seat. slide the seat forward or backward.
the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat. If
a child safety seat is installed on the pas- To enter the 3rd row from outside the ve- Slide the entire seat forward for access to
senger’s side of the 2nd row seat, the 3rd hicle, lift up on the seatback lever located the rear seats.
row can be accessed without removing the on the upper outboard side of the seat- To return the seat to a locked position,
child safety seat. back on the 2nd row bench seat. This will push the upper seatback rearward until
release the back of the seat and fold up the the seatback and track are locked.
seat cushion. This will also release the seat
tracks so you will be able to slide the seat
forward or backward.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 WARNING To return the seat to a locked position,
push the upper seatback rearward until
∙ Do not leave a child in the child safety the seatback and track are locked.
seat when operating the child seat ac-
cess mode. WARNING
∙ When returning the seat to its original When returning the seat to its original
position, confirm that the seat and position, confirm that the seat and
seatback are locked properly. seatback are locked properly.

CAUTION CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or Be careful not to pinch your hand or
foot or bump your head when operat- foot or bump your head when operat-
ing the walk-in seat. ing the walk-in seat.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat LRS2913
tipped up. 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row ADJUSTMENT
seat to pinch, hit any part of your body
or other people when operating the Reclining
2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path
To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch
is clear of all objects before moving
located on the outside corner of each seat-
the seat.
back. Lean back until the desired angle is
Exiting the 3rd row obtained.
To exit the 3rd row from either seating po- To bring the seatback forward again, pull
sition, lift the upper seatback release lever up on the latch and pull the seatback up-
to the uppermost position. This will release right until the desired angle is obtained.
the back of the seat, then fold the seat
The recline feature allows adjustment of
cushion up and release the tracks.
the seatback for occupants of different
Slide the entire seat forward. sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
of your vehicle that is not equipped
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
using a seat belt properly.
lever is in P (Park).
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
WARNING use the same seat belt.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the ∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
seat to make sure it is securely locked. occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be – Make sure that the seat path is
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not clear before moving the seat.
be against your body. In an accident, LRS2924 – Be careful not to allow hands or
you could be thrown into it and re- feet to get caught or pinched in the
ceive neck or other serious injuries. ARMRESTS
seat.
You could also slide under the lap belt The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped
and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ Head restraints/headrests should be
with an armrest. Pull the armrest down as adjusted properly as they may pro-
∙ For the most effective protection shown. vide significant protection against in-
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat jury in an accident. Always replace
should be upright. Always sit well FLEXIBLE SEATING
and adjust them properly if they have
back and upright in the seat and ad- been removed for any reason.
just the seat belt properly. For addi- WARNING
tional information, refer to “Precau- ∙ If the head restraints/headrests are
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
tions on seat belt usage” in this removed for any reason, they should
cargo area or on the rear seats when
section. be securely stored to prevent them
they are in the fold-down position. In a
from causing injury to passengers or
collision, people riding in these areas
damage to the vehicle in case of sud-
without proper restraints are more
den braking or an accident.
likely to be seriously injured or killed.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the 3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of
upright position, be certain they are the outboard seats to fold the seat-
completely secured in the latched po- backs flat.
sition. If they are not completely se- 4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
cured, passengers may be injured in seating position, push up on the seat-
an accident or sudden stop. back until it latches in place.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.

LRS2144
Folding the 2nd row bench seat
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for
maximum cargo hauling:
1. Make sure that the head
restraints/headrests are lowered or re-
moved. To remove the head
restraint/headrest, push and hold the
lock knob while moving the head
restraint/headrest in an upward direc-
tion. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.
2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks found on the sides of the
vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating WARNING

position:
Head restraints/headrests supplement
1. Use the pull straps 䊊C to raise each
the other vehicle safety systems. They
seatback. Pull back until the seatback may provide additional protection
latches into position. Make sure to against injury in certain rear end colli-
properly raise each seatback to an sions. Adjustable head
upright and secured position. restraints/headrests must be adjusted
2. Do not use the pull strap to return the properly, as specified in this section.
head restraint/headrest to the upright Check the adjustment after someone
position. Pull back on the head else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
restraint/headrest until it latches in the thing to the head restraint/headrest
upright position. stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
LRS2915 WARNING if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
Folding the 3rd row seats When the seat is returned to the normal was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
seating position, the head just the head restraint/headrest before
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum restraints/headrests must be returned an occupant uses the seating position.
cargo capacity: to the upright position to properly pro- Failure to follow these instructions can
1. Pull the strap 䊊
A to release the head tect vehicle occupants. reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraint/headrest forward. restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat in a collision.
belt hooks 䊊D found on the sides of the
cargo area.
3. Pull up on the latch 䊊
B located in the
upper corner of each seatback and
lower the seatback forward over the
seat base.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 ∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the cen-
ter of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
LRS2308 LRS2300
– If your ear position is still higher than
The illustration shows the seating posi-
the recommended alignment, place
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
tions equipped with head HEADREST COMPONENTS
the head restraint/headrest at the
restraints/headrests.
highest position. 1. Removable head restraint/headrest
䉱 Indicates the seating position is ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
equipped with a head restraint. 2. Multiple notches
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped and locked in place before riding in that 3. Lock knob
with a headrest. designated seating position. 4. Stalks
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE
RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the
COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest:
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
2. Single notch the highest position.
3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob.
4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 LRS2302 LRS2303 WRS0134
REMOVABLE (without Dual Head INSTALL ADJUST
Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat 1. Align the head restraint/headrest For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Mobile Entertainment System stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
(MES) only) sure that the head restraint/headrest is
center is level with the center of your ears. If
facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches) 䊊 1 must be your ear position is still higher than the
CAUTION recommended alignment, place the head
installed in the hole with the lock knob
Do not remove head restraint/headrest
from vehicles equipped with Dual Head
䊊2 . restraint/headrest at the highest position.

Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Mobile 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
Entertainment System (MES). Removal the head restraint/headrest down.
may damage the system wiring. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

 LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306
For non-adjustable head restraint/ Raise Lower
headrest
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is up. push the head restraint/headrest down.
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
seating position. positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated
seating position. seating position.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
seating position, the head
restraint/headrest must be returned to
the upright position to properly protect
vehicle occupants.

LRS2307
FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST
To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the
strap located on the rear of the head
restraint/headrest.
If the head restraint/headrest has been
folded, make sure that it is returned to the
upright position.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knobs are engaged
in the notches before riding in that desig-
nated seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven.
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in ∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-
this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the
rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase
restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

 ∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
retractor. It is recommended that you
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
effectiveness.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
tractors and attaching hardware,
use the same seat belt.
should be inspected after any colli-
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle sion. It is recommended that you visit
than there are seat belts. a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
continuously while the ignition is assemblies in use during a collision be
turned ON with all doors closed and all replaced unless the collision was mi-
SSS0014 seat belts fastened, it may indicate a nor and the belts show no damage
malfunction in the system. Have the and continue to operate properly.
WARNING system checked. It is recommended Seat belt assemblies not in use during
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this a collision should also be inspected
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
service. and replaced if either damage or im-
your shoulder and across your chest.
proper operation is noted.
Never put the belt behind your back, ∙ No changes should be made to the
under your arm or across your neck. seat belt system. For example, do not ∙ All child restraints and attaching
The belt should be away from your modify the seat belt, add material, or hardware should be inspected after
face and neck, but not falling off your install devices that may change the any collision. Always follow the re-
shoulder. seat belt routing or tension. Doing so straint manufacturer’s inspection in-
may affect the operation of the seat structions and replacement recom-
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
belt system. Modifying or tampering mendations. The child restraints
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
with the seat belt system may result should be replaced if they are
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
in serious personal injury. damaged.
could increase the risk of internal inju-
ries in an accident.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 For additional information, refer to “Warn- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
ing lights, indicator lights and audible re- WITH RETRACTOR
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
WARNING
PREGNANT WOMEN ∙ Every person who drives or rides in
NISSAN recommends that pregnant this vehicle should use a seat belt at
women use seat belts. The seat belt should all times. Children should be in the
be worn snug and always position the lap rear seats and in an appropriate
belt as low as possible around the hips, not restraint.
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
shoulder and across your chest. Never run the seatback is reclined. This can be
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- be against your body. In an accident,
LRS0786 ommendations. you could be thrown into it and re-
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT INJURED PERSONS ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front NISSAN recommends that injured persons and receive serious internal injuries.
seats are equipped with a seat belt warn- use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
ing light. The warning light, located on the ∙ For the most effective protection
specific recommendations.
instrument panel, will show the status of when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
the driver and passenger seat belt. should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
NOTE: feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to LRS2160
release the seat belt. Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 LRS2662 LRS2674
Power front seat shown (if so equipped) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
tractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle 䊊A until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
 The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt tain that the seatbacks are completely
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or secured in the latched position. If they
during certain impacts. are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks stop.
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
LRS2675
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
3. Position the lap belt portion low and fer to “Child restraints” in this section.
snug on the hips 䊊B as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward child restraint installation. During nor-
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊C .
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
your shoulder and across your chest.
tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
The front passenger seat and the rear belt tension. It can also change the op-
seating positions’ three-point seat belts eration of the front passenger air bag.
have two modes of operation: For additional information, refer to
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) “Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-
ward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.

WRS0139 SSS0896
Unfastening the seat belts 䊊A Shoulder belt height adjust button
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button Shoulder belt height adjustment
on the buckle 䊊 1 . The seat belt automati-
(front and 2nd row outboard
cally retracts.
seats)
Checking seat belt operation The shoulder belt anchor height should be
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock adjusted to the position best for you. For
seat belt movement by two separate additional information, refer to “Precau-
methods: tions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from To adjust, push the button 䊊 A and then
the retractor move the shoulder belt anchor to the de-
sired position so that the belt passes over
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
falling off of your shoulder. Release the ad- ∙ Driver and front passenger seating po-
justment button to lock the shoulder belt sition
anchor into position.
∙ 2nd and 3rd row seating position
WARNING It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-
extender if an extender is required.
ment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in WARNING
position. ∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height made by the same company which
should be adjusted to the position made the original equipment seat
best for you. Failure to do so may re- belts, should be used with NISSAN
duce the effectiveness of the entire seat belts.
LRS2157
restraint system and increase the 3rd row shown; 2nd row similar ∙ Adults and children who can use the
chance or severity of injury in an standard seat belt should not use an
accident. Seat belt hook extender. Such unnecessary use
∙ The shoulder belt should rest on the When the seat belt is not in use and when could result in serious personal injury
middle of the shoulder. It must not folding down the rear seats, hook the rear in the event of an accident.
rest against the neck. seat belts on the seat belt hooks. ∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-
stall child restraints. If the child re-
∙ Be sure that the seat belt is not SEAT BELT EXTENDERS straint is not secured properly, the
twisted in any way.
If, because of body size or driving position, it child could be seriously injured or
∙ Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is not possible to properly fit the killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
is secured by trying to move the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
shoulder belt anchor up and down af-
that is compatible with the installed seat
ter adjustment.
belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and are available for the:
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
 CHILD SAFETY

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE WARNING ∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply Do not allow children to play with the ∙ Booster seats
a mild soap solution or any solution rec- seat belts. Most seating positions are The proper restraint depends on the child’s
ommended for cleaning upholstery or equipped with Automatic Locking Re- size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
allow the seat belts to retract until they in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
are completely dry. facing child restraints are available for chil-
child can be seriously injured or killed if
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seats are used to help position a vehicle
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
cloth. unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-
lease the child by cutting the seat belt
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat with a suitable tool (such as a knife or WARNING
belt and the metal components, such scissors) to release the seat belt. Infants and children need special pro-
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
wires and anchors, work properly. If Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained. fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other come too close to the face or neck. The
damage on the webbing is found, the In addition to the general information in lap belt may not fit over their small hip
entire seat belt assembly should be re- bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
this manual, child safety information is
placed. ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-
available from many other sources, includ-
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic tal injury. Always use appropriate child
safety offices, and community organiza- restraints.
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
learn the best way to transport your child.
territories require the use of approved child
There are three basic types of child re- restraints for infants and small children. For
straint systems: additional information, refer to “Child re-
∙ Rear-facing child restraints straints” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

A child restraint may be secured in the ve- SMALL CHILDREN Once a child outgrows the height or weight
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- limit of the harness-equipped forward-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or Children that are over 1 year old and weigh facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a that the child be placed in a commercially
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
available booster seat to obtain proper
section. sible up to the height or weight limit of the
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens height or weight limit of the rear-facing booster seat should raise the child so that
and children be restrained in the rear child restraint and are at least 1 year old the shoulder belt is properly positioned
seat. Studies show that children are should be secured in a forward-facing child across the chest and the top, middle por-
safer when properly restrained in the restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
rear seat than in the front seat. facturer’s instructions for minimum and should not cross the neck or face and
maximum weight and height recommen- should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
This is especially important because should lie snugly across the lower hips or
your vehicle has a supplemental re- dations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
straint system (air bag system) for the seat can only be used in seating positions
front passenger. For additional informa- comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle that have a three-point type seat belt. The
tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
System (SRS)” in this section. Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- have a label certifying that it complies with
INFANTS ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
tions for installation and use. Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
A booster seat should be used until the
placed in a rear-facing child restraint. LARGER CHILDREN child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with Children should remain in a forward-facing ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or child restraint with a harness until they vehicle seatback?
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. reach the maximum height or weight limit
You should choose a child restraint that fits allowed by the child restraint manufac- ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-
your vehicle and always follow the manu- turer. ing?
facturer’s instructions for installation and ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
use. the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt NOTE:
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
Laws in some communities may follow
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
different guidelines. Check local and
and shoulder)?
state regulations to confirm your child is
∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad- using the correct restraint system before
justed head restraint/headrest? traveling.
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

CHILD RESTRAINTS

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forward-
facing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
ARS1098 WRS0256 seat. An inflating air bag could se-
riously injure or kill a child. A rear-
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD – The child restraint must be used facing child restraint must only be
RESTRAINTS and installed properly. Always fol- used in the rear seat.
low all of the child restraint manu-
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
WARNING facturer’s instructions for installa-
straint that will fit the child and ve-
tion and use.
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- hicle. Some child restraints may
structions for proper use and installa- – Infants and children should never not fit properly in your vehicle.
tion of child restraints could result in be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
serious injury or death of a child or strongest adult cannot resist the
other passengers in a sudden stop or forces of a collision.
collision: – Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Child restraint anchorages are de- ∙ When the child restraint is not in use, ∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-
signed to withstand only those keep it secured with the LATCH system tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-
loads imposed by correctly fitted or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col- tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-
child restraints. Under no circum- lision, loose objects can injure occu- dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
stances are they to be used to at- pants or damage the vehicle. ∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
tach adult seat belts, or other items to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing CAUTION cle’s seat and seat belt system.
so could damage the child re-
straint anchorages. The child re- A child restraint in a closed vehicle can ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
straint will not be properly in- become very hot. Check the seating your vehicle, place your child in the child
stalled using the damaged surface and buckles before placing a
restraint and check the various adjust-
anchorage, and a child could be se- child in the child restraint.
ments to be sure the child restraint is
riously injured or killed in a This vehicle is equipped with a universal compatible with your child. Choose a
collision. child restraint anchor system, referred to child restraint that is designed for your
– Never use the anchor points for as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers child’s height and weight. Always follow
adult seat belts, or other items. for CHildren) system. Some child restraints all recommended procedures.
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ∙ If the combined weight of the child and
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the ments that can be connected to these an- child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
front passenger seat. chors. For additional information, refer to (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for anchors or the seat belt to install the
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- CHildren) system” in this section.
sible after fitting the child child restraint (not both at the same
restraint. If you do not have a LATCH compatible time).
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be ∙ If the combined weight of the child and
– Infants and children should always
used. child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle. Several manufacturers offer child re- (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
straints for infants and children of various the lower anchors) to install the child
sizes. When selecting any child restraint, restraint.
keep the following points in mind:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

 ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
manufacturer’s instructions for installa- install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
tion. the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or tions for installation.
territories require that infants and small The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-
children be restrained in an approved vided to install child restraints in the follow-
child restraint at all times while the ve- ing positions only:
hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
quires the top tether strap on forward- ∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
facing child restraints be secured to the positions
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
LRS2922
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
LATCH system lower anchor locations -
structions for proper use and installa-
bench seat
tion of child restraints could result in
LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
Your vehicle is equipped with special an-
chor points that are used with LATCH sys- – Attach LATCH system compatible
tem compatible child restraints. This sys- child restraints only at the loca-
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX tions shown in the illustration.
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- – Do not secure a child restraint in
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat the 2nd row center position using
belt to secure the child restraint unless the the LATCH system anchors. The
combined weight of the child and child re- child restraint will not be secured
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- properly.
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
– Inspect the lower anchors by in-
serting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured prop-
erly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to at- LRS3036 LRS2930
tach adult seat belts, or other items LATCH lower anchor location LATCH label locations 2nd row bench
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child re- LATCH lower anchor location
straint anchorages. The child re- The LATCH lower anchors are located as
straint will not be properly in- shown. A label is attached to the seatback
stalled using the damaged to help you locate the LATCH lower an-
anchorages, and a child could be chors.
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

 Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously in-
jured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
LRS0661 LRS0662 ∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment signed to withstand only those loads
Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully imposed by correctly fitted child re-
read and follow the instructions in this straints. Under no circumstances are
lower anchor attachments they to be used to attach adult seat
manual and those supplied with the child
LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. belts, or other items or equipment to
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- the vehicle. Doing so could damage
ments that can be connected to two an- the child restraint anchorages. The
chors located at certain seating positions child restraint will not be properly in-
stalled using the damaged anchor-
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
ages, and a child could be seriously
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
injured or killed in a collision.
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using
the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
LRS2553 LRS2916 Always follow the child restraint manu-
2nd row bench seat 3rd row bench seat facturer’s instructions.
䊊
1 Top tether strap If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
䊊
2 Anchor point you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Top tether anchor point locations REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
Anchor points are located in the following INSTALLATION USING LATCH
locations: For additional information, refer to all Warn-
∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
seatback in the seating positions “Child restraints” sections of this manual
shown. before installing a child restraint.

∙ 3rd row bench on the bottom of the

seatback on the passenger side seat-
ing position as shown.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

 LRS2997 LRS2996 LRS0673
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- 3. For child restraints that are equipped
tachments to the LATCH lower an- with webbing-mounted attachments,
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH remove any additional slack from the
attachment is properly attached to the anchor attachments. Press downward
lower anchors. and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
all child restraints fit in all types of ve- the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
hicles. chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
5. Check to make sure the child restraint instructions for installation.
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
steps 1 through 4. child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
LRS0674 The three-point seat belt with Auto-
Rear-facing – step 4 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
4. After attaching the child restraint, test used when installing a child restraint.
it before you place the child in it. Push it Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
from side to side while holding the child the child restraint not being properly
restraint near the LATCH attachment secured. The restraint could tip over or
path. The child restraint should not be loose and cause injury to a child in a
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from sudden stop or collision.
side to side. Try to tug it forward and For additional information, refer to all Warn-
check to see if the LATCH attachment ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
holds the restraint in place. If the re- “Child restraints” sections of this manual
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH before installing a child restraint.
attachment as necessary, or put the
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
restraint in another seat and test it bined weight of the child and the child re-
again. You may need to try a different straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
child restraint or try installing by using bined weight of the child and the child
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
 WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3
1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
therefore must not be used in the buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
front seat. Position the child restraint engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint mode). It reverts to the ELR
on the seat. Always follow the child re- straint manufacturer’s instructions for mode when the seat belt is fully re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing. tracted.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 LRS2396 WRS0762 LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the 6. After attaching the child restraint, test
the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it
in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat restraint near the seat belt path. The
cushion and seatback while pulling up child restraint should not move more
on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
 7. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward-
straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat using the LATCH system:
steps 3 through 6.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu-
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer’s instructions.
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual LRS2995
before installing a child restraint. Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
Do not use the lower anchors if the com- step 2
bined weight of the child and the child re- 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- tachments to the LATCH lower an-
bined weight of the child and the child chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use attachment is properly attached to the
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- lower anchors.
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure If the child restraint is equipped with a
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s top tether strap, route the top tether
instructions for installation. strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

LRS2994 LRS0671
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing – step 4
Do not install child restraints that re- 4. For child restraints that are equipped
quire the use of a top tether strap in with webbing-mounted attachments,
seating positions that do not have a remove any additional slack from the
top tether anchor. anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
3. The back of the child restraint should child restraint with your knee to com-
be secured against the vehicle seat- press the vehicle seat cushion and
back. seatback while tightening the webbing
If necessary, adjust or remove the head of the anchor attachments.
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- 5. Tighten the tether strap according to
rect child restraint fit. If the head the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
restraint/headrest is removed, store it move any slack.
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
 7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697 LRS2553
Forward-facing – step 6 2nd row bench seat
6. After attaching the child restraint, test 䊊
1 Top tether strap
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child 䊊
2 Anchor point
restraint near the LATCH attachment Installing top tether strap
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from The child restraint top tether strap must be
side to side. Try to tug it forward and used when installing the child restraint with
check to see if the LATCH attachment the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
holds the restraint in place. If the re- First, secure the child restraint with the
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench out-
attachment as necessary, or put the board seating positions only).
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2nd row bench seat WARNING FORWARD-FACING CHILD
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads THE SEAT BELTS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are WARNING
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For they to be used to attach adult seat The three-point seat belt with Auto-
belts, or other items or equipment to matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
additional information about head
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the used when installing a child restraint.
restraint/headrest adjustment, re-
child restraint anchorages. The child re- Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
moval and installation, refer to “Head straint will not be properly installed us-
restraints/headrests” in this section. the child restraint not being properly
ing the damaged anchorage, and a secured. The restraint could tip over or
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 over child could be seriously injured or killed be loose and cause injury to a child in a
the seatback. in a collision. sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
senger air bag. For additional informa-
anchor point 䊊
2 as shown.
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
4. Tighten the tether strap according to and status light” in this section.
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

 Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat an adjustable head restraint/headrest
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- and it is interfering with the proper
ger seat: child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu-
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions.
step 1
The back of the child restraint should
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
be secured against the vehicle seat-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
back.
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
Do not use the lower anchors if the com- rect child restraint fit. If the head
bined weight of the child and the child re- restraint/headrest is removed, store it
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
bined weight of the child and the child the head restraint/headrest when
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the child restraint is removed. For ad-
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- ditional information about head
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure restraint/headrest adjustment, re-
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s moval and installation, refer to “Head
instructions for installation. restraints/headrests” in this section.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
 Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

WRS0680 LRS2394
Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
straint manufacturer’s instructions for when the seat belt is fully retracted.
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (2nd row in-
stallation only). For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

 LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test
the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it
in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child
restraint with your knee to compress restraint near the seat belt path. The
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback child restraint should not move more
while pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the manufacturer’s instructions to re- the belt holds the restraint in place. If
move any slack. the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 4 through 8.

LRS0865 LRS2553
Forward-facing – step 10 2nd row bench seat
10. If the child restraint is installed in the 䊊
1 Top tether strap
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front 䊊
2 Anchor point
passenger air bag status light Installing top tether strap
should illuminate. If this light is not illu-
minated, refer to “Front passenger air The child restraint top tether strap must be
bag and status light” in this section. used when installing the child restraint with
Move the child restraint to another seat belts.
seating position. Have the system First, secure the child restraint with the seat
checked. It is recommended that you belt.
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

2nd row bench seat 3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
move any slack. Make sure the head
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest restraint/headrest does not contact
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to the top tether strap.
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
If you have any questions when install-
when the child restraint is removed. For
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
additional information about head
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
restraint/headrest adjustment, re-
service.
moval and installation, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
WARNING
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 as
Child restraint anchorages are de-
shown.
signed to withstand only those loads
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether imposed by correctly fitted child re- LRS2916
anchor point 䊊
2 as shown. straints. Under no circumstances are 3rd row bench seat
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to 䊊
1 Top tether strap
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the 䊊
2 Anchor point
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us- 3rd row bench seat
CENTER SEATING POSITION
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 as child could be seriously injured or killed WARNING
shown. in a collision. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child re-
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether straint with a top tether strap can only
anchor point 䊊
2 as shown. be used on the passenger side seating
position. Do not place in the driver’s side
seating position and attempt to angle
the tether strap to the passenger side
seating position.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The passenger side of the 3rd row bench WARNING Precautions on booster seats
seat is the seating position that can use a
top tether strap. First, secure the child re- Child restraint anchorages are de- WARNING
straint with the seat belt, as applicable. signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re- If a booster seat and seat belt are not
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 as straints. Under no circumstances are used properly, the risk of a child being
shown. they to be used to attach adult seat injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
belts, or other items or equipment to lision greatly increases:
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
anchor point 䊊
2 as shown. – Make sure the shoulder portion of
child restraint anchorages. The child re- the belt is away from the child’s
3. Tighten the tether strap according to straint will not be properly installed us- face and neck and the lap portion
the manufacturer’s instructions to re- ing the damaged anchorage, and a of the belt does not cross the
move any slack. Make sure the head child could be seriously injured or killed stomach.
restraint/headrest does not contact in a collision.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
the top tether strap. BOOSTER SEATS behind the child or under the
If you have any questions when install- child’s arm.
For additional information on installing a
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- – A booster seat must only be in-
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this structions outlined in this section. stalled in a seating position that
service. has a lap/shoulder belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

 LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

A. Low back booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-
by several manufacturers. When selecting erly supported by the booster seat or
B. High back booster seat
any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
in mind: or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
certifying that it complies with Federal
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
If the seatback is lower than the center
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
dard 213.
seat should be used.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 ∙ If the booster seat is compatible with For additional information, refer to all Warn-
your vehicle, place the child in the ings and Cautions in the “Child safety,”
booster seat and check the various ad- “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
justments to be sure the booster seat is tions of this manual before installing a child
compatible with the child. Always follow restraint.
all recommended procedures.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or in the 2nd or 3rd rows or in the front pas-
territories require that infants and small senger seat:
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat. WRS0699
Booster seat installation 1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
WARNING rearmost position.

To avoid injury to child, do not use the 2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- Always follow the booster seat manu-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts. facturer’s instructions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

 If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
LRS0454 belt is positioned across the top, LRS0865
Front passenger position middle portion of the child’s shoulder. 7. If the booster seat is installed in the
3. The booster seat should be positioned Be sure to follow the booster seat front passenger seat, place the ignition
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. manufacturer’s instructions for adjust- switch in the ON position. The front pas-
ing the seat belt routing.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head senger air bag status light may or
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- may not illuminate, depending on the
rect booster seat fit. If the head structions for properly fastening a seat size of the child and the type of booster
restraint/headrest is removed, store it belt shown in “Three-point type seat seat being used. For additional infor-
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall belt with retractor” in this section. mation, refer to “Front passenger air
the head restraint/headrest when bag and status light” in this section.
the booster seat is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and The supplemental air bags operate only
rollover supplemental air bag system when the ignition switch is placed in the
This SRS section contains important infor- ON position.
mation concerning the following systems: This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and After placing the ignition switch in the
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen- rear outboard seating positions in certain ON position, the supplemental air bag
tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags warning light illuminates. The supple-
vanced Air Bag System) are designed to inflate on the side where mental air bag warning light will turn off
the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the after about 7 seconds if the system is
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact curtain air bags are designed to inflate and operational.
supplemental air bag remain inflated for a short time.
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and The SRS is designed to supplement the
rollover supplemental air bag crash protection provided by the driver and
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front front passenger seat belts and is not a
seats) substitute for them. Seat belts should al-
ways be correctly worn and the occupant
Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- seated a suitable distance away from the
tem steering wheel, instrument panel and door
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can finishers. For additional information, refer
help cushion the impact force to the head to “Seat belts” in this section.
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-
lisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
 steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then in-
flates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
WRS0031 with an occupant classification sen-
sor (weight sensor) that turns the
WARNING ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
front passenger air bag OFF under
are most effective when you are sit-
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not some conditions. This sensor is only
ting well back and upright in the seat.
inflate in the event of a side impact, used in this seat. Failure to be properly
The front air bags inflate with great
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity seated and wearing the seat belt can
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
frontal collision. Always wear your increase the risk or severity of injury in
Air Bag System, if you are unre-
seat belts to help reduce the risk or an accident. For additional informa-
strained, leaning forward, sitting side-
severity of injury in various kinds of tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
ways or out of position in any way, you
accidents and status light” in this section.
are at greater risk of injury or death in
∙ The front passenger air bag will not a crash. You may also receive serious ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
inflate if the passenger air bag status or fatal injuries from the front air bag steering wheel. Placing them inside
light is lit. For additional information, if you are up against it when it inflates. the steering wheel rim could increase
refer to “Front passenger air bag and Always sit back against the seatback the risk that they are injured when the
status light” in this section. and as far away as practical from the front air bag inflates.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

WARNING WARNING
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Front seat-mounted side-impact
Bag System, never install a rear- supplemental air bags and roof-
facing child restraint in the front seat. mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
An inflating front air bag could seri- over supplemental air bags:
ously injure or kill your child. For addi-
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
tional information, refer to “Child re-
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
straints” in this section.
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

 WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
LRS3119 hand out of the window or lean WRS0032
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown WARNING
in the previous illustrations.
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
4. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag infla-
tors
8. Satellite sensors
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
10. Crash zone sensor

LRS3059

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 WARNING ∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is ∙ Do not position the front passenger
installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat,
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
seat so the child restraint contacts the the air bag system may determine a
tem, please observe the following
instrument panel. If the child restraint sensor malfunction has occurred and
items.
does contact the instrument panel, the front passenger air bag status
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear the system may determine the seat is light may illuminate and the supple-
bench seats to push or pull on the occupied and the passenger air bag mental air bag warning light may
seatback pocket. may deploy in a collision. Also the flash.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional in- This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
restraint/headrest or in the seatback formation about installing and using
child restraints, refer to “Child re- front passenger seats. This system is de-
pocket. signed to meet certification requirements
straints” in this section.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing press- under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
ing against the rear of the seatback, ∙ Confirm the operating condition with
Canada. However, all of the information,
such as a child restraint installed in the front passenger air bag status
cautions and warnings in this manual
the rear seat or an object stored on light.
still apply and must be followed.
the floor. ∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as The driver supplemental front-impact air
∙ Make sure that there is no object bag is located in the center of the steering
placed under the front passenger described in this section, get the oc-
cupant classification system checked. wheel. The front passenger supplemental
seat. front-impact air bag is mounted in the
It is recommended that you visit a
∙ Make sure that there is no object NISSAN dealer for this service. dashboard above the glove box. The front
placed between the seat cushion and air bags are designed to inflate in higher
center console or between the seat ∙ Until you have confirmed with a
severity frontal collisions, although they
cushion and the door. dealer that your passenger seat occu-
pant classification system is working may inflate if the forces in another type of
properly, position the occupants in collision are similar to those of a higher
the rear seating positions. severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- If you have any questions about your air Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
cation of proper front air bag system op- bag system, it is recommended that you belts should be correctly worn and the
eration. visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information driver and front passenger seated upright
about the system. If you are considering as far as practical away from the steering
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
modification of your vehicle due to a dis- wheel or instrument panel. The front air
monitors information from the crash zone
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
tact information is contained in the front of the front occupants. Because of this, the
belt buckle sensors and occupation classi-
this Owner’s Manual. force of the front air bag inflating can in-
fication sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-
crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
eration is based on the severity of a colli- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For noise may be heard, followed by the re-
module during inflation.
the front passenger, the occupant classifi- lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
cation sensor is also monitored. Based on and does not indicate a fire. Care should be The front air bags deflate quickly after a
information from the sensor, only one front taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- collision.
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on tion and choking. Those with a history of a
The front air bags operate only when the
the crash severity and whether the front breathing condition should get fresh air
ignition switch is in the ON position.
occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- promptly.
tionally, the front passenger air bag may be After placing the ignition switch in the
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
automatically turned off under some con- ON position, the supplemental air bag
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
ditions, depending on the weight detected warning light illuminates. The supple-
the face and chest of the front occupants.
on the front passenger seat and how the mental air bag warning light will turn off
They can help save lives and reduce seri-
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air after about 7 seconds if the system is
ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta- operational.
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
tus light will be illuminated. For additional
injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-
information, refer to “Front passenger air
straint to the lower body.
bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate im-
proper performance of the system.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 Front passenger air bag and status light Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
WARNING an occupant classification sensor (weight
The front passenger air bag is designed sensor) that turns the front passenger air
to automatically turn OFF under some bag on or off depending on the weight ap-
conditions. Read this section carefully plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-
to learn how it operates. Proper use of tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
necessary for most effective protec- bag status light which is located on
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in the instrument panel.
this manual concerning the use of After the ignition switch is placed in the
seats, seat belts and child restraints can "ON" position, the front passenger air bag
increase the risk or severity of injury in status light on the instrument panel illumi-
an accident. nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
LRS0865
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
PASSENGER AIR BAG
CONDITION DESCRIPTION FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
STATUS LIGHT ( )
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information related to the Front passenger air bag
placed on the front passenger seat may normal operation and troubleshooting of
The front passenger air bag is designed to
also cause the light to operate as de- this occupant classification sensor system,
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
scribed above depending on their weight. please refer to “Normal operation” and
operated under some conditions as de-
“Troubleshooting” in this section.
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, pant takes his/her weight off the seat placed on the seat could result in air bag
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, inflation, because of the object’s weight de-
and other air bags in your vehicle are not by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by tected by the occupant classification sen-
part of this system. otherwise being out of position), this could sor. Other conditions could also result in air
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
The purpose of the regulation is to help
Always be sure to be seated and wearing on the seat, or if two children are on the
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
the seat belt properly for the most effective seat, contrary to the instructions in this
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
protection by the seat belt and supple- manual. Always be sure that you and all
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-
mental air bag. vehicle occupants are seated and re-
ing the air bag to be automatically turned
strained properly.
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
requirements. children be properly restrained in a rear Using the front passenger air bag status
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- light, you can monitor when the front pas-
The occupant classification sensor in this propriate child restraints and booster senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
detect an occupant and objects on the this is not possible, the occupant classifica- If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- front passenger air bag status light is illu-
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- scribed above to turn the front passenger minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn air bag OFF for specified child restraints as it could be that the person is a small adult,
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- required by the regulations. Failing to prop- or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child erly secure child restraints and to use the using the seat belt properly.
restraint of the type specified in the regula- ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
If a child restraint must be used in the front
tions is on the seat, its weight and the move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
seat, the front passenger air bag status
child’s weight can be detected and cause also result in the passenger air bag inflat-
light may or may not be illuminated, de-
the air bag to turn OFF. ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For
pending on the size of the child and the
additional information about proper use
Front passenger seat adult occupants who type of child restraint being used. If the air
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in
are properly seated and using the seat belt bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-
this section.
as outlined in this manual should not ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
cause the front passenger air bag to be If the front passenger seat is not occupied, it could be that the child restraint or seat
automatically turned OFF. For small adults the front passenger air bag is designed not belt is not being used properly. Make sure
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu- to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects that the child restraint is installed properly,
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
the seat belt is used properly and the occu- recommended that you visit a NISSAN Steps
pant is positioned properly. If the air bag dealer for this service.
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
status light is still not illuminated, reposi- Normal operation section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-
tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear
In order for the occupant classification ing against the seatback, and centered
seat.
sensor system to classify the front passen- on the seat cushion with your feet com-
If the front passenger air bag status light ger based on weight, please follow the pre- fortably extended to the floor.
will not illuminate even though you believe cautions and steps outlined below: 2. Make sure there are no objects on your
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
Precautions lap.
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle ∙ Make sure that there are no objects 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on “Seat belts” section of this manual.
check system status by using a special the seat or placed in the seatback Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-
tool. However, until you have confirmed pocket. tus is monitored by the occupant clas-
with a dealer that your air bag is working ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other sification system, and is used as an in-
properly, reposition the occupant or child object is not pressing against the rear put to determine occupancy status. So,
restraint in a rear seat. of the seatback. it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
front passenger air bag status light will pushing or pulling on the back of the 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
take a few seconds to register a change in front passenger seat. allowing the system to classify the
the front passenger seat status. This is nor- front passenger before the vehicle is
mal system operation and does not indi- ∙ Make sure that the front passenger put into motion.
seat or seatback is not forced back
cate a malfunction.
against an object on the seat or floor 5. Ensure proper classification by check-
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- behind it. ing the front passenger air bag status
ger air bag system, the supplemental air ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed light.
bag warning light , located in the me- under the front passenger seat.
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

NOTE: However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE:
adult, then this may be due to the following
This vehicle’s occupant classification A system check will be performed during
sensor system generally keeps the clas- conditions that may be interfering with the
which the front passenger air bag status
sification locked during driving, so it is weight sensors:
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
important that you confirm that the ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially.
front passenger is properly classified against the seatback, and centered on
prior to driving. However, the occupant If the light is still ON after this, the person
the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
classification sensor may recalculate the should be advised not to ride in the front
fortably extended to the floor.
weight of the occupant under some con- passenger seat and the vehicle should be
ditions (both while driving and when ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
stopped), so front passenger seat occu- against the rear of the seatback. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
pants should continue to remain seated this service.
as outlined above. ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat. 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
Troubleshooting child or child restraint occupying the
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
If you think the front passenger air bag front passenger seat.
against an object on the seat or floor
status light is incorrect: behind it. This may be due to the following con-
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying ditions that may be interfering with the
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
the front passenger seat: weight sensors:
senger seat.
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
∙ An object placed between the seat leaning against the seatback, and cen-
light is functioning as intended. The
cushion and center console or between tered on the seat cushion with his/her
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
the seat cushion and the door. feet comfortably extended to the floor.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ The child restraint is not properly in-
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-
correct any of the above conditions. Re- straints” section of this manual.
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
 ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passen- ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
against the rear of the seatback. ger and no objects on the front pas- to your vehicle’s electrical system,
senger seat, the vehicle should be suspension system or front end struc-
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
checked. It is recommended that you ture. This could affect proper opera-
the back of the front passenger seat.
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- tion of the front air bag system.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback sible.
against an object on the seat or floor ∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-
Other supplemental front-impact air tem may result in serious personal in-
behind it.
bag precautions jury. Tampering includes changes to
∙ An object placed under the front pas- the steering wheel and the instru-
senger seat. WARNING ment panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering wheel pad and
∙ An object placed between the seat ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-
above the instrument panel or by in-
cushion and center console. ing wheel pad or on the instrument
stalling additional trim material
panel. Also, do not place any objects
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a around the air bag system.
between any occupant and the steer-
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and ing wheel or instrument panel. Such ∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-
correct any of the above conditions. Re- objects may become dangerous pro- senger seat may affect the function of
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. jectiles and cause injury if the front air the air bag system and result in seri-
bags inflate. ous personal injury.
NOTE:
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
A system check will be performed during front air bag system components will
which the front passenger air bag status be hot. Do not touch them; you may
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds severely burn yourself.
initially. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be
If the light is still OFF after this, the small made to any components or wiring of
adult, child or child restraint should be re- the supplemental air bag system. This
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle is to prevent accidental inflation of
should be checked as soon as possible. It is the supplemental air bag or damage
recommended that you visit a NISSAN to the supplemental air bag system.
dealer for this service.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front ∙ It is recommended that you visit a
passenger seat may result in serious NISSAN dealer for work on and around
personal injury. For example, do not the front air bag. It is also recom-
change the front seats by placing ma- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
terial on the seat cushion or by install- for installation of electrical equip-
ing additional trim material, such as ment. The Supplemental Restraint
seat covers, on the seat that are not System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
specifically designed to assure proper should not be modified or discon-
air bag operation. Additionally, do not nected. Unauthorized electrical test
stow any objects under the front pas- equipment and probing devices
senger seat or the seat cushion and should not be used on the air bag
seatback. Such objects may interfere system.
with the proper operation of the occu-
∙ A cracked windshield should be re-
pant classification sensor (weight
placed immediately by a qualified re- WRS0381
sensor).
pair facility. A cracked windshield
∙ No unauthorized changes should be could affect the function of the Front seat-mounted side-impact
made to any components or wiring of supplemental air bag system. supplemental air bag and
the seat belt system. This may affect roof-mounted curtain side-
the front air bag system. Tampering *The SRS wiring harness connectors are
with the seat belt system may result yellow and orange for easy identifica- impact and rollover supplemental
in serious personal injury. tion. air bag systems
When selling your vehicle, we request that The side air bags are located in the outside
you inform the buyer about the front air of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-
bag system and guide the buyer to the
tain air bags are located in the side roof
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
rails in all three rows. All of the informa-
Manual.
tion, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air
bags and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity side collisions, al-
though they may inflate if the forces in an-
1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
other type of collision are similar to those of juries. However, an inflating side air bag or mental air bag warning light will turn off
a higher severity impact. They are de- curtain air bag may cause abrasions or after about 7 seconds if the system is
signed to inflate on the side where the ve- other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air operational.
hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in bags do not provide restraint to the lower
certain side collisions. body. WARNING
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn ∙ Do not place any objects near the
in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver and passenger seated up- seatback of the front seats. Also, do
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- right as far as practical away from the side not place any objects (an umbrella,
ments (for example, during severe off- air bag. Rear seat passengers should be bag, etc.) between the front door fin-
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to seated as far away as practical from the isher and the front seat. Such objects
inflate. door finishers and side roof rails. The side may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
inflates.
an indication of proper side air bag and in order to help protect the occupants. Be-
curtain air bag operation. cause of this, the force of the side air bags ∙ Right after inflation, several side air
and curtain air bags inflating can increase bag and curtain air bag system com-
When the side air bags and curtain air bags the risk of injury if the occupant is too close ponents will be hot. Do not touch
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, to, or is against, these air bag modules dur- them; you may severely burn yourself.
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate ∙ No unauthorized changes should be
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
quickly after the collision is over. made to any components or wiring of
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those the side air bag and curtain air bag
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
with a history of a breathing condition systems. This is to prevent damage to
short time.
should get fresh air promptly. or accidental inflation of the side air
The side air bags and curtain air bags bag and curtain air bag systems.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat operate only when the ignition switch is
belts, help to cushion the impact force on ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
placed in the ON position. to your vehicle’s electrical system,
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to After placing the ignition switch in the suspension system or side panel. This
the head of occupants in the front and rear ON position, the supplemental air bag could affect proper operation of the
outboard seating positions in all rows. They warning light illuminates. The supple- curtain air bag systems.
can help save lives and reduce serious in-
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys- Seat belt with pretensioner(s) ∙ It is recommended that you visit a
tem may result in serious personal in- (front seats) NISSAN dealer for work on and around
jury. For example, do not change the the pretensioner system. It is also rec-
front seats by placing material near WARNING ommended that you visit a NISSAN
the seatbacks or by installing addi- dealer for installation of electrical
tional trim material, such as seat cov- ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused equipment. Unauthorized electrical
ers, around the side air bag. after activation. They must be re- test equipment and probing devices
placed together with the retractor should not be used on the preten-
∙ It is recommended that you visit a and buckle as a unit. sioner system.
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a ∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-
is also recommended that you visit a collision but pretensioner(s) are not sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
NISSAN dealer for installation of elec- activated, be sure to have the preten- ommended that you visit a NISSAN
trical equipment. The SRS wiring har- sioner system checked and, if neces- dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
nesses* should not be modified or dis- sary, replaced. It is recommended that posal procedures could cause per-
connected. Unauthorized electrical you visit a NISSAN dealer for this sonal injury.
test equipment and probing devices service.
should not be used on the side air bag ∙ No unauthorized changes should be The pretensioner system may activate
or curtain air bag systems. made to any components or wiring of with the supplemental air bag system in
the pretensioner system. This is to certain types of collisions. Working with the
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors prevent damage to or accidental acti- seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
are yellow or orange for easy identifica- vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-
tion. ing with the pretensioner system may comes involved in certain types of colli-
When selling your vehicle, we request that result in serious personal injury. sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
you inform the buyer about the side air pants.
bags and curtain air bag system and guide The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
the buyer to the appropriate sections in seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-
this Owner’s Manual. chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- WARNING
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi- Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to on a seat protected by an air bag in
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
choking. Those with a history of a breath- cause serious injury or death.
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner system. For additional
WRS0885
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the opera- 1. SRS Air bag warning labels
tion of the supplemental air bag warning The warning labels are located on the
light indicates there is a malfunction, have surface of the sun visor.
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
vice. LABELS
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten- Warning labels about the supplemental
sioner system and guide the buyer to the front-impact air bag system are placed in
appropriate sections in this Owner’s the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

 If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag procedure
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
remains on after approximately 7 sec- inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-
onds. minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light mental air bag warning light remains illu-
flashes intermittently. minated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or re-
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light placed as soon as possible. It is recom-
does not come on at all. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
Under these conditions, the front air bag, this service.
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner When maintenance work is required on the
LRS0100
systems may not operate properly. They vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING must be checked and repaired. It is recom- curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-
LIGHT mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for lated parts should be pointed out to the
this service. person performing the maintenance. The
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, ignition switch should always be placed in
WARNING the LOCK position when working under the
monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. If the supplemental air bag warning hood or inside the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON light is on, it could mean that the front
position, the supplemental air bag warning air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and and/or pretensioner systems will not
then turns off. This means the system is operate in an accident. To help avoid
operational. injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

 WARNING ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
checked to verify it is still functioning
bag module will not function again
correctly. It is recommended that you
and must be replaced. Additionally,
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
the activated pretensioner(s) must
The OCS should be checked even if no
also be replaced. The air bag module
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
and pretensioner(s) should be re-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
placed. It is recommended that you
function may result in an improper air
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
bag deployment resulting in injury or
However, the air bag module and pre-
death.
tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Rear window and outside mirror
Distance To Empty (DTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 (if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Climate controlled seat switches
How to use the vehicle information (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Heated 2nd row seat switches
Resetting the trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Heated steering wheel switch Type A
Vehicle information display warnings (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Heated steering wheel Type B (if so equipped) . . 2-48
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-48
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-49 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Warning systems switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-51 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Dual panel moonroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
TOW mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
120v outlet (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Console side pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-77
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vents (P. 4-31)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-39)
3. Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-42)
4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-53)
Horn (P. 2-43)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-11)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)
6. Twin trip odometer reset switch
(P. 2-5)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (P. 2-36)
8. Control panel*
9. Center display*
Navigation system*
(if so equipped)
10. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-53)
11. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-53)
12. Glove box (P. 2-57)
13. Automatic heater and air
conditioning controls (P. 4-32)
LII2409

2-2 Instruments and controls

14. Audio system controls* *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
15. Hazard warning flasher switch Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
(P. 6-2) Refer to the page number indicated in
16. Push-button ignition switch parenthesis for operating details.
(P. 5-11)
17. Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)
18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-42)
19. Control panel and vehicle informa-
tion display switches (P. 2-20)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
20. Hood release (P. 3-32)
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-48)
TOW mode switch (P. 2-53)
Liftgate instrument panel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-32)
Warning systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter clus-
ter. The odometer is located within the ve-
hicle information display.

LIC3597
1. Tachometer 4. Speedometer
2. Warning and indicator lights 5. Fuel gauge
3. Vehicle information display 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Odometer
Twin trip odometer

2-4 Instruments and controls

 Changing the display
Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 2 on the right
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:

Trip → Trip → Odometer Mile-

age → Trip
Resetting the trip odometer
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
2 for more
than 1 second resets the currently dis-
played trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to
empty information is also available. For ad-
LIC2255 LIC3460
ditional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
Speedometer Odometer/Twin trip odometer mation display” in this section.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. The odometer and the twin trip odometer
䊊1 are displayed in the vehicle information
display when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5

 CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.
LIC2219 LIC2220
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant
the engine into the red zone 䊊
1 .
temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range 䊊 1 when
CAUTION the gauge needle points within the zone
When engine speed approaches the red shown in the illustration.
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating
the engine in the red zone may cause The engine coolant temperature varies
serious engine damage. with the outside air temperature and driv-
ing conditions.

2-6 Instruments and controls

 Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- Changes in driving patterns or conditions
isters 0 (Empty). can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,
The indicates that the fuel-filler the value displayed may differ from the ac-
door is located on the driver’s side of the tual distance that can be driven.
vehicle. DTE display will change to “---” when the
fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to
CAUTION the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
NOTE:
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. ∙ The DTE value after refill is estimated
After a few driving trips, the light based on recent fuel economy and
should turn off. If the light remains on amount of fuel added.
after a few driving trips, have the ve- ∙ If a small amount of fuel is added, or
LIC2222 hicle inspected. It is recommended the ignition is on during refueling, the
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
FUEL GAUGE service.
display may not be updated.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel ∙ Conditions that affect the fuel
∙ For additional information, refer to
level in the tank. economy will also affect the esti-
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
mated DTE value (city/highway driv-
The gauge may move slightly during brak- this section.
ing, idle time, remote start time, ter-
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) rain, seasonal weather, added vehicle
down hills. Displays the estimated distance the ve- weight, added deflectors, roof racks,
hicle can be driven before refueling. The etc.).
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-
ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF value is calculated based on recent fuel
position. economy, the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump-
The low fuel warning message shows in tion.
the vehicle information display when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Instruments and controls 2-7

COMPASS (if so equipped)

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism You can also calibrate the compass by driv-
and indicates the heading direction of the ing your vehicle on your everyday route.
vehicle. The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.
With the ignition placed in the ON position,
press the button as described in the
charts below to activate various features of
the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Press and hold
Feature:
the
(Push button again for about
button for
1 second to change settings)
about:
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
8 seconds to correct false compass read- LIC1487
ings
COMPASS DISPLAY
Compass enters calibration
10 seconds
mode Press the button for about one sec-
For additional information, refer to “Auto- ond when the ignition switch is placed in
matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the the ON position to toggle the compass di-
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- rection display 䊊
1 on or off. The display will
tion of this manual. indicate the direction that the vehicle is
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-
pass by driving the vehicle in three com-
plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
2-8 Instruments and controls
 Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as vari-
ance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instruc-
tions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for
about 8 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display. Re-
lease the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the button repeatedly to
toggle through the zone numbers until
the desired number appears in the dis-
play. Once you have selected a zone
number, the display will show a com-
pass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with au-
tomatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this proce-
WIC0355
dure.
Instruments and controls 2-9
1. With the display turned on, press and CAUTION
hold the button for about 9 sec-
onds. The display will read “C.” ∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the means of a magnet. They affect the
vehicle in three complete circles at a operation of the compass.
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
3. After completing the circles the display towel or similar material dampened
should return to normal. with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
∙ If the compass deviates from the cor- cleaner directly on the mirror as it
rect indication soon after repeated ad- may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
justment, have the system checked. It is the mirror housing.
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ The compass may not indicate the cor-
rect compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill. (The
compass returns to the correct com-
pass point when the vehicle moves to
an area where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light
warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
warning light

or Brake warning light Front fog light indicator light Side light and headlight indicator light
(if so equipped) (green)

Charge warning light Front passenger air bag status light Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) TOW mode ON indicator light

Master warning light Hill descent control system ON Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
indicator light (if so equipped)

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS The following lights (if so equipped) will function. Have the system checked. It is
With all doors closed, apply the parking come on briefly and then go off: recommended that you visit a NISSAN
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the dealer for this service.
ignition switch in the ON position without or , , , , Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
starting the engine. The following lights (if , , played on the vehicle information display
so equipped) will come on: between the speedometer and tachom-
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve-
, or , , a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- hicle information display” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS Automatic Emergency Low brake fluid warning light
For additional information on warnings Braking (AEB) system When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information warning light position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
display” in this section. level. If the light comes on while the engine
This light comes on when the ignition is running with the parking brake not ap-
or Anti-lock Braking switch is placed in the ON position. It illumi- plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-
nates briefly and then turns off. lowing:
System (ABS)
This light illuminates when the AEB system 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
warning light is set to OFF on the meter display. fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-
position, the ABS warning light illuminates tem is on, it may indicate that the system is it-yourself ” section of this manual.
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is unavailable. For additional information, re- 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
operational. fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” the warning system checked. It is rec-
in the “Starting and driving” section of this ommended that you visit a NISSAN
If the ABS warning light illuminates while manual. dealer for this service.
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning or Brake warning
properly. Have the system checked. It is light
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
Parking brake indicator
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without anti- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
lock assistance. For additional information, position, this light comes on when the
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and parking brake is applied.
driving” section of this manual.

2-12 Instruments and controls

 WARNING It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN When the low tire pressure warning light
dealer for this service. illuminates, you should stop and adjust
∙ Your brake system may not be work- the tire pressure of all four tires to the
ing properly if the warning light is on. CAUTION recommended COLD tire pressure shown
Driving could be dangerous. If you on the Tire and Loading Information la-
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to Do not continue driving if the generator
bel located in the driver’s door opening.
the nearest service station for repairs. belt is loose, broken or missing.
The low tire pressure warning light does
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed Low tire pressure warning not automatically turn off when the tire
because driving it could be pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
dangerous. light flated to the recommended pressure,
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- the vehicle must be driven at speeds
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
level may increase your stopping dis-
spare. warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel. to check the tire pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the of low tire pressure or indicates that the The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake TPMS is not functioning properly. appears each time the ignition switch is
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the placed in the ON position as long as the low
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
brake system has been checked. It is tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
position, this light illuminates for about
recommended that you visit a NISSAN nated.
1 second and turns off.
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
Low tire pressure warning
information display” in this section, “Tire
Charge warning light If the vehicle is being driven with low tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
pressure, the warning light will illumi- “Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-
If this light comes on while the engine is nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” gency” sections of this manual.
running, it may indicate the charging sys- warning also appears in the vehicle in-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the formation display.
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.

Instruments and controls 2-13

TPMS malfunction
∙ If the light does not illuminate with the ∙ When replacing a wheel without the
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the ignition switch placed in the ON posi- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
low tire pressure warning light will flash for tion, have the vehicle checked as soon will not function and the low tire pres-
approximately 1 minute when the ignition as possible. It is recommended that you sure warning light will flash for ap-
switch is placed in the ON position. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. proximately 1 minute. The light will re-
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the main on after 1 minute. Have your
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
system checked. It is recommended that avoid sudden steering maneuvers or tires replaced and/or TPMS system
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
pull off the road to a safe location and mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. for these services.
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a Driving with under-inflated tires may ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
TPMS malfunction. permanently damage the tires and in- nally specified by NISSAN could affect
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- the proper operation of the TPMS.
For additional information, refer to “Tire rious vehicle damage could occur and
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of Check the tire pressure for all four tires. ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
Adjust the tire pressure to the recom- regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
this manual.
mended COLD tire pressure shown on check the tire pressure regularly.
the Tire and Loading Information label
WARNING located in the driver’s door opening to ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect turn the low tire pressure warning light of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
electric medical equipment. Those off. If the light still illuminates while TPMS may not operate correctly.
who use a pacemaker should contact driving after adjusting the tire pres- ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
the electric medical equipment sure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may tires to the four wheels correctly.
manufacturer for the possible influ- be malfunctioning. If you have a flat
ences before use. tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires
are properly inflated, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-14 Instruments and controls

 Master warning light ∙ When the power steering warning For additional information, refer to “Power
light illuminates with the engine run- steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
When the ignition is in the ON position, the ning, there will be no power assist for tion of this manual.
master warning light illuminates if any of the steering. You will still have control Seat belt warning light and
the following are displayed on the vehicle of the vehicle, but the steering will be
information display. harder to operate. Have the power chime
steering system checked. It is recom- The light and chime remind you to fasten
∙ No key warning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer your seat belts. The light illuminates when-
∙ Low fuel warning for this service. ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated
∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning
position, the power steering warning light until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
∙ Parking brake release illuminates. After starting the engine, the same time, the chime sounds for about
power steering warning light turns off. This 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
∙ Door open warning
indicates the power steering is operational. securely fastened.
∙ Low tire pressure warning
If the power steering warning light illumi- The seat belt warning light may also illumi-
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle nates while the engine is running, it may nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
information display” in this section. indicate the power steering is not function- fastened when the front passenger’s seat
ing properly and may need servicing. Have is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
Power steering warning switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-
the power steering checked. It is recom-
light mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for tem does not activate the warning light for
this service. the front passenger.
WARNING For additional information, refer to “Seat
When the power steering warning light illu-
∙ If the engine is not running or is minates with the engine running, there will belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
turned off while driving, the power as- be no power assist for the steering, but you supplemental restraint system” section of
sist for the steering will not work. will still have control of the vehicle. At this this manual.
Steering will be harder to operate.
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.

Instruments and controls 2-15

 Supplemental air bag (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and Front passenger air bag
supplemental restraint system” section of
warning light status light
this manual.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON The front passenger air bag status light will
or START position, the supplemental air WARNING be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
bag warning light illuminates for about off depending on how the front passenger
If the supplemental air bag warning
7 seconds and then turns off. This means seat is being used.
light is on, it could mean that the front
the system is operational.
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag For additional information, refer to “Front
If any of the following conditions occur, the and/or pretensioner systems will not passenger air bag and status light” in the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, operate in an accident. To help avoid “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
and pretensioner seat belt systems need injury to yourself or others, have your tal restraint system” section of this manual.
servicing: vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN High beam indicator light
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light dealer for this service. (blue)
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds. INDICATOR LIGHTS This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light For additional information, refer to “Vehicle the low beams are selected.
flashes intermittently. information display” in this section.
The high beam indicator light also comes
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light Front fog light indicator on when the passing signal is activated.
does not come on at all. light (if so equipped) Hill descent control system
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN The front fog light indicator light illumi-
dealer for these services. nates when the front fog lights are on. For
ON indicator light (if so
Unless checked and repaired, the supple- additional information, refer to “Fog light equipped)
mental restraint system (air bag system) switch” in this section. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func- position, this light comes on briefly and
tion properly. For additional information, re- then turns off.
fer to “Supplemental Restraint System The light comes on when the hill descent
control system is activated.
2-16 Instruments and controls
If the hill descent control switch is on and After a few driving trips, the light ∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
the indicator light blinks, the system is not should turn off if no other potential emis- been detected which may damage the
engaged. sion control system malfunction exists. emission control system. To reduce or
If this indicator light comes on steady for avoid emission control system dam-
If the indicator light does not come on
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds age:
when the hill descent switch is on, the sys-
tem may not be functioning properly. Have when the engine is not running, it indicates – do not drive at speeds above
the system checked. It is recommended that the vehicle is not ready for an emission 45 mph (72 km/h).
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to – avoid hard acceleration or decelera-
vice.
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance tion.
For additional information, refer to “Hill de- (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
– avoid steep uphill grades.
scent control switch” in this section and “Hill information” section of this manual.
descent control system” in the “Starting – if possible, reduce the amount of
Operation
and driving” section of this manual. cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
Malfunction Indicator Light The MIL may stop blinking and come on
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
(MIL) system malfunction has been de- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
If this indicator light comes on steady or tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the for this service. You do not need to have
blinks while the engine is running, it may Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the your vehicle towed to the dealer.
indicate a potential emission control mal- vehicle information display. If the fuel-
function. filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or CAUTION
install the cap and continue to drive the
The MIL may also come on steady if the vehicle. The light should turn off Continued vehicle operation without
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the having the emission control system
after a few driving trips. If the light
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure does not turn off after a few driving checked and repaired as necessary
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is could lead to poor driveability, reduced
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least recommended that you visit a NISSAN fuel economy, and possible damage to
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. dealer for this service. You do not need the emission control system.
to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-17
 Overdrive OFF indicator turn on. For additional information, refer to For additional information, refer to “Tow
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this mode switch” in this section.
light
section.
The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi- Turn signal/hazard
nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se- Slip indicator light indicator lights
lected. The appropriate light flashes when the turn
This indicator light will blink when the Ve- signal switch is activated.
For additional information, refer to “Driving hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec- erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
tion of this manual. that the road surface is slippery and the turned on.
Security indicator light vehicle is nearing its traction limits. Vehicle Dynamic Control
You may feel or hear the system working; (VDC) OFF indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is this is normal.
This indicator light comes on when the
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The light will blink for a few seconds after VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-
The blinking security indicator light indi- the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. cates the VDC system has been turned off.
cates that the security systems equipped Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
on the vehicle are operational. The indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the engine and the system will operate normally.
For additional information, refer to “Security For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
ON position. The light will turn off after ap-
systems” in this section. Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-
ing and driving” section of this manual.
Side light and headlight erational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recom- The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on
indicator light (green) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for when you place the ignition switch in the
The side light and headlight indicator light this service. ON position. The light will turn off after
illuminates when the side light or head- about 2 seconds if the system is opera-
lights are on (not including the Daytime TOW mode ON indicator tional. If the light stays on or comes on
Running Lights system or signature lights). light along with the indicator light while
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO posi- you are driving, have the VDC system
tion, the side light and headlight indicator This light comes on when the tow mode checked. It is recommended that you visit a
light will illuminate when the headlights function is on. NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-18 Instruments and controls
 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

While the VDC system is operating, you Light reminder chime

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-
tem working when starting the vehicle or With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
accelerating, but this is normal. position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
AUDIBLE REMINDERS lights are on.

Brake pad wear warning Turn the headlight control switch off or to
AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
replacement, it makes a high pitched buzzer (if so equipped)
scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- any one of the following improper opera-
pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon tions is found.
LIC2205
as possible if the warning sound is heard. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN ∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve- The vehicle information display is located
hicle when locking the doors. to the left of the speedometer. It displays
dealer for this service.
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when such items as:
Key reminder chime locking the doors. ∙ Vehicle settings
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
opened while the ignition switch is placed ∙ Trip computer information
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For
in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the additional information, refer to “NISSAN In- ∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if
OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks so equipped)
Key left in the vehicle. Make sure the igni- and adjustments” section of this manual.
tion switch is placed in the LOCK position, ∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) information (if
and take the Intelligent Key with you when so equipped)
leaving the vehicle. ∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so
equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-19

∙ Cruise control system information (if so 2. — navigate through the items in
equipped) the vehicle information display
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system ENTER — change or select an item in
information (if so equipped) the vehicle information display
∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-
3. — go back to the previous menu
mation
The ENTER and buttons also control
∙ Indicators and warnings audio and control panel functions. For ad-
∙ Tire Pressure information ditional information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the ve-
LIC2245
hicle information include:
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE ∙ Active system status (if so equipped)
INFORMATION DISPLAY ∙ Trip computer
The vehicle information display can be ∙ Tire pressure information
navigated using the , , ENTER ,
∙ 4WD (if so equipped)
and buttons located on the steering
wheel. ∙ Fuel economy
1. — select/enter the vehicle infor- ∙ Distance to empty
mation display menu items or to ∙ Warnings
change from one display screen to the
next (i.e. trip, settings, fuel economy) Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information on
warnings and indicators refer to “Vehicle
information display warnings and indica-
tors” in this section.
2-20 Instruments and controls
To control what items display in the vehicle SETTINGS ∙ Alarms
information display, refer to “Main menu se- The setting mode allows you to change the ∙ Language
lection” in this section. information displayed in the vehicle infor-
mation display: ∙ Unit
RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped) ∙ Welcome Effect
1. Press the button until you reach
the trip computer mode. ∙ Vehicle Settings ∙ Factory Reset

2. Press the button again for more ∙ Main Menu Selection Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel ∙ Body Color The driver assistance menu allows the user
consumption, average speed, distance to change the various driving aids, parking
to empty, and journey time. ∙ Maintenance aids and braking features.
Menu item Result
Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids.
Blind Spot Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional
information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids.
Sensor Allows user to turn the parking sensor on or off.
Display Allows user to turn the parking sensor display on or off.
Volume Allows user to change the volume of the parking aid chimes.
Range Allows user to select the range in which the parking sensors will activate.
Emergency Braking (if so equipped) Displays the available emergency braking options.
System Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings menu allows the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item Result
Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options.
Off When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
Alert & Horn When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.
Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.
Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.
Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.
Wiper with Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.
I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock feature on or off. When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock op-
eration is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door un-
lock operation is performed once.
Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off.
Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely.
Battery Saver Allows user to turn the battery saver feature on or off.
Exit Seat Slide (if so equipped) When the exit seat slide is on the driver’s seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC
position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Exit Steering Up (if so equipped) When the exit steering up feature is turned on, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Main Menu Selection
The main menu selection menu allows the
user to customize the information that ap-
pears in the vehicle information display
when the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
Menu item Result
Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off.
Audio Allows user to turn the audio display on or off.
Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off.
Driver Assistance (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driver assistance display on or off.
Trip Computer Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off.
4WD (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4WD display on or off.
Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off.

Body Color
The body color menu allows the user to
select the color of vehicle that appears in
the vehicle information display.
Menu item Result
Body Color Displays the available colors for the vehicle in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Maintenance WARNING does not mean your tires will last that
The maintenance menu allows the user to long. Use the tire replacement indicator
The tire replacement indicator is not a
set reminders for various vehicle mainte- as a guide only and always perform
substitute for regular tire checks, in-
nance items. regular tire checks. Failure to perform
cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-
regular tire checks, including tire pres-
tional information, refer to “Changing
sure checks could result in tire failure.
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
Serious vehicle damage could occur
section of this manual. Many factors in-
and may lead to a collision, which could
cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving
result in serious personal injury or
habits and road conditions affect tire
death.
wear and when tires should be re-
placed. Setting the tire replacement in-
dicator for a certain driving distance

Menu item Result

Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items
other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire
rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance
for service type items.
For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the dis-
tance for replacing tires.
Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items
other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire
rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Alarms
The alarms menu allows the user to set
various alerts.
Menu item Result
Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.

Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the ve-
hicle information display.
Menu item Result
Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to custom-
ize the information that appears in the ve-
hicle information display.
Menu item Result
Mileage Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display.
Tire Pressures (if so equipped) Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display.
Temperature Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Welcome Effect
The welcome effect menu allows the user
to control the welcome effect feature.
Menu item Result
Welcome Effect Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display set-
tings to factory status.
Menu item Result
Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-26 Instruments and controls

 LIC4201

Instruments and controls 2-27

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 18. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so 34. Transmission Shift Position indicator
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS equipped)
35. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
1. No Key Detected 19. Door Open
36. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
2. Key ID Incorrect 20. Liftgate Open so equipped)

3. Key low battery 21. Timer Alert – Have a break? 37. Rear Door Alert is activated

4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s 22. Low Outside Temperature 38. Check Back Seat For All Articles
Manual 23. Power will turn off to save the battery 39. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
5. Key Registration Complete indicator
24. Power turned off to save the battery
6. Shift to Park No Key Detected
25. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
7. Push Ignition to OFF This warning appears when the Intelligent
26. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-
8. Push brake and start switch to drive Manual (if so equipped)
tion switch in the ON position. Make sure
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent 27. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Manual (if so equipped)
Key system (if I-Key battery is low) For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
28. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
10. Release Parking Brake
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so and adjustments” section of this manual.
11. Low Fuel equipped)
Key ID Incorrect
12. Loose Fuel Cap 29. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped) This warning appears when the ignition
13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual switch is placed from the OFF position and
30. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
14. Low Washer Fluid system. You cannot start the engine with
31. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air an unregistered key.
32. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
(if so equipped)
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
17. Intelligent 4x4 indicators (if so equipped) 33. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse and adjustments” section of this manual.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Key low battery Shift to Park Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- This warning illuminates when the ignition
gent Key battery is running out of power. switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the This indicator appears when the battery of
shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-
If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- a chime sounds when the ignition switch is telligent Key system and the vehicle are not
tery with a new one. For additional infor- in the ACC or OFF position. communicating normally.
mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in
If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. If this appears, touch the ignition switch
to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual Push Ignition to OFF the brake pedal. For additional information,
After the ignition switch is pushed to the After the Push Ignition to OFF warning illumi- refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
ON position, this light comes on for a period nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition charge” in the “Starting and driving” section
of time and then turns off. switch is placed in the ACC position when the of this manual.
The I-Key System Error message warns of shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. Release Parking Brake
a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- To turn off the Push warning, place the ig- This warning illuminates in the message
tem. If the light comes on while the engine nition switch in the ON position and then in area of the vehicle information display
is stopped, it may be impossible to start the LOCK position.
when the parking brake is set and the ve-
the engine.
Push brake and start switch to drive hicle is driven.
If the light comes on while the engine is
This indicator appears when the shift lever Low Fuel
running, you can drive the vehicle. However, is in the P (Park) position.
in these cases, have the system checked. It This warning illuminates when the fuel level
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN This indicator also appears when the ve- in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
dealer for this service. hicle has been started using the Remote soon as it is convenient, preferably before
Engine Start (if so equipped) function. the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
Key Registration Complete
This indicator means that the engine will will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
This appears when a new Intelligent Key is start by pushing the ignition switch with when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
registered to the vehicle. the brake pedal depressed. You can start (Empty).
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Loose Fuel Cap nates and low tire pressure is detected. The 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
warning appears each time the ignition equipped)
This warning appears when the fuel-filler
switch is placed in the ON position as long
cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- This warning appears when the 4-wheel
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
hicle has been refueled. For additional in- drive system is not functioning properly.
mains illuminated. If this warning appears,
formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the For additional information, refer to “Intelli-
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- gent 4x4 (I-4x4)” in the “Starting and driving”
sures of all four tires to the recommended
tion of this manual. section of this manual.
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual Loading Information label. For additional Door Open
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
This warning appears in the message area This warning illuminates when a door has
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-
of the vehicle information display if low oil been opened.
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-
“Starting and driving” section of this Liftgate Open
signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil
manual.
pressure warning is not designed to indi- This warning illuminates when the liftgate
cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual has been opened.
check the oil level. For additional informa-
This warning appears when there is an er- Timer Alert — Have a break?
tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-
ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes
yourself” section of this manual. This indicator appears when the set time is
on, have the system checked. It is recom-
Low Washer Fluid reached. The time can be set up to six
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
hours. For additional information, refer to
This warning illuminates when the this service.
“Settings” in this section.
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Intelligent 4x4 indicators (if so
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. Low Outside Temperature
equipped)
For additional information, refer to This warning appears if the outside tem-
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it- These indicators show the Intelligent 4x4
perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-
yourself” section of this manual. system status while the engine is running.
ture can be changed to display in Celsius or
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air For additional information, refer to “Intelli- Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-
gent 4x4 (I-4x4)” in the “Starting and driving” fer to “Settings” in this section.
This warning appears when the low tire
section of this manual.
pressure warning light in the meter illumi-
2-30 Instruments and controls
Power will turn off to save the battery Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s If one or more of these warning appears,
Manual (if so equipped) have the system checked. It is recom-
This message appears in the vehicle infor-
mended that you visit an NISSAN dealer for
mation display after a period of time if the This warning illuminates when there is an
this service.
ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON posi- error with the system. For additional infor-
tion and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For addi- mation, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
tional information, refer to “Push-button igni- in the “Starting and driving” section of this
This message appears when the Blind
tion switch positions” in the “Starting and manual.
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
driving” section of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
Power turned off to save the battery Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so because a radar blockage is detected. For
equipped) additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
This message appears after the ignition
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
switch is automatically turned off. For addi- This indicator shows when the BSW and
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
tional information, refer to “Push-button ig- RCTA systems are engaged.
of this manual.
nition switch positions” in the “Starting and
For additional information, refer to “Blind
driving” section of this manual. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Reminder: Turn OFF headlights Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” This indicator shows the cruise control sys-
section of this manual. tem status.
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual When cruise control is activated, a green
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The
OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- This warning appears when one or more of
vehicle information display will also display
mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal the following systems (if so equipped) is
the speed the cruise control was set at. If
switch” in this section. not functioning properly:
you accelerate past the set speed, the
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) speed will blink until you either cancel
Manual (if so equipped) cruise control or go back to the set speed. If
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
cruise control is on and canceled, the
This warning illuminates when there is an ∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) speed will be displayed to show the speed
error with the system. For additional infor-
the vehicle will return to if the resume but-
mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
ton is activated.
switch” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if WARNING
(if so equipped) so equipped)
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a
This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise This warning appears when the Intelligent stop within a trip temporarily dismisses
Control (ICC) system status. The status is Cruise Control (ICC) system becomes un- the message for that stop without turn-
shown by the color. For additional informa- available because the front radar is ob- ing the system off. Alerts can be pro-
tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” structed. For additional information, refer vided for other stops during the trip. Se-
in the “Starting and driving” section of this to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” or “Auto- lecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear
manual. matic Emergency Braking ” in the “Starting Door Alert system for the remainder of
and driving” section of this manual. a trip and no audible alert will be
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse provided.
Rear Door Alert is activated
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this When the system is enabled, this message NOTE:
warning appears, push in the extended appears when the Rear Door Alert system This system is disabled until a driver en-
storage switch to turn off the warning. For is active and can remind the driver to check ables it using the vehicle information
additional information, refer to “Extended the back seat. display. For additional information, refer
storage switch” in this section. to “How to use the vehicle information
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
Transmission Shift Position indicator can select “Dismiss Message” to clear display” in this section.
the display for a period of time. If no For additional information, refer to “Rear
This indicator shows the transmission shift
selection is made, this message auto- Door Alert” in this section.
position.
matically turns off after a period of time.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual Check Back Seat For All Articles
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
This warning illuminates when there is a can select “Disable Alert” to disable the When the system is enabled, this message
problem with the CVT system. If this warn- horn alert for the remainder of the cur- appears when the vehicle comes to a com-
ing comes on, have the system checked. It rent trip. plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,
dealer for this service. and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes-
sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,
to check for items in the rear seat after the
audible alert has been provided.
2-32 Instruments and controls
 SECURITY SYSTEMS

NOTE: The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
This system is disabled until a driver en-
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
ables it using the vehicle information
nents in all situations. Always secure your
display. For additional information, refer
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
to “How to use the vehicle information
Never leave your Intelligent Key in the ve-
display” in this section.
hicle, and always lock the vehicle when un-
For additional information, refer to “Rear attended. Be aware of your surroundings,
Door Alert” in this section. and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever
possible.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
indicator Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
This indicator shows when the AEB system tion markers, and tracking systems, are
is engaged. available at auto supply stores and spe-
LIC2930 cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
Your vehicle has two types of security sys- such equipment. Check with your insur-
tems: ance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
∙ Vehicle security system features.
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors, liftgate, or hood when the
system is armed. It is not, however, a mo-
tion detection type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-
tion occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-33

How to arm the vehicle security ∙ Even when the driver and/or passen- The alarm is activated by:
system gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and ∙ opening a door without using the key
1. Close all windows. (The system can be liftgate locked with the ignition fob (even if the door is unlocked by us-
armed even if the windows are open.) switch placed in the LOCK position. ing the inside lock knob or the power
When placing the ignition switch in door lock switch).
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve- the ACC or ON position, the system
hicle. How to stop an activated alarm
will be released.
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock Vehicle security system activation or the liftgate with the mechanical key (if so
all doors. The doors can be locked with
The vehicle security system will give the equipped), pressing the button on
the Intelligent Key, door handle request following alarm: the Intelligent Key, or pushing the request
switch, or mechanical key (if so
∙ The hazard lights blink (for non I-key switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door
equipped).
vehicle) or the headlights (for I-key ve- with the Intelligent Key in range of the door
4. Confirm that the security indica- hicle) blink and the horn sounds inter- handle.
tor light stays on for about 30 seconds. mittently.
The vehicle security system is now pre-
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after SYSTEM
armed. The vehicle security system will
a period of time. However, the alarm
automatically shift into the armed The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
phase. The security light begins will not allow the engine to start without
with again. The alarm can be shut off by
to flash once every three seconds. If unlocking the driver’s door by pressing the use of a registered key.
during the pre-armed phase one of the the button on the key fob or plac- If the engine fails to start using a registered
following occurs, the system will not ing the ignition switch in the ON or ACC key (for example, when interference is
arm: position. caused by another registered key, an auto-
∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechani- mated toll road device or automatic pay-
cal key (if so equipped), the Intelligent ment device on the key ring), restart the
Key or door request switch. engine using the following procedures:

∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
position. sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2-34 Instruments and controls

 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or NOTE:
LOCK position and wait approximately
Changes or modifications not expressly
10 seconds. approved by the party responsible for
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in- For Canada:
terference) separate from the regis- This device complies with Industry
tered key. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
If the no start condition reoccurs, NISSAN Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
recommends placing the registered key on
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
a separate key ring to avoid interference
cept any interference received, including
from other devices. interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. LIC0474
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Security indicator light
FCC Notice:
The security indicator light blinks whenever
For USA: the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,
This device complies with Part 15 of the LOCK or ACC position.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
lowing two conditions: (1) This device Immobilizer System is operational.
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer- If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
ence received, including interference
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
that may cause undesired operation.
position.

Instruments and controls 2-35

 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the CAUTION

engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as ∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
soon as possible. Please bring all regis- ously for more than 30 seconds.
tered keys that you have. It is recom- ∙ Do not operate the washer if the
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
for this service. empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
LIC3028
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
SWITCH OPERATION
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
WARNING centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
In freezing temperatures the washer pouring the fluid into the windshield-
solution may freeze on the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
and obscure your vision which may lead windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
to an accident. Warm the windshield mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
with the defroster before you wash the centrate and water.
windshield.

2-36 Instruments and controls

NOTE: Push the lever up 䊊 4 to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
If the windshield wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may Pull the lever toward you 䊊5 to operate the
stop moving to protect its motor. If this washer. The wiper will also operate several
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF times.
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- NOTE:
proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on The Wiper with Speed feature may be
again to operate the wiper. disabled. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle information display” in
The windshield wiper and washer operates
this section.
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper LIC3101
at the following speed: REAR SWITCH OPERATION
䊊
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
eration can be adjusted by turning the WARNING
knob toward 䊊 A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
In freezing temperatures the washer
Also, the intermittent operation speed solution may freeze on the rear window
varies in accordance with the vehicle and obscure your vision which may lead
speed (if so equipped). (For example, to an accident. Warm the rear window
when the vehicle speed is high, the in- with the defroster before you wash the
termittent operation speed will be rear window.
faster.)
䊊
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-
eration
䊊
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed op-
eration
Instruments and controls 2-37
 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
CAUTION If the rear window wiper operation is inter-
rupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop
∙ Do not operate the washer continu- moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
ously for more than 30 seconds. turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove
∙ Do not operate the washer if the the snow, etc. on and around the wiper
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch
empty. on again to operate the wiper.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid The rear window wiper and washer oper-
reservoir with windshield-washer ate when the ignition switch is in the ON
fluid concentrates at full strength. position. Turn the switch clockwise from
Some methyl alcohol based the OFF position to operate the wiper.
windshield-washer fluid concen- 䊊
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
trates may permanently stain the eration (not adjustable)
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir. 䊊
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed op- LIC1388
eration To defrost the rear window glass and out-
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- side mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-
centrates with water to the manufac- Push the switch forward 䊊 3 to operate the
gine and push the rear window defroster
turer’s recommended levels before washer. The wiper will also operate several
times. switch on. The rear window defroster indi-
pouring the fluid into the windshield- cator light on the switch comes on. Push
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con- The rear window defroster automatically
centrate and water. turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

2-38 Instruments and controls

 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio sys-
tem.

LIC3240 LIC3237
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION
Lighting Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
䊊
1 Rotate the switch to the position, battery.
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.

䊊
2 Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-39

 ∙ Turn on the headlights if the windshield
wipers make multiple continuous
passes within approximately one min-
ute of the first pass (if so equipped). The
headlights remain on until the wipers
are turned off for a short period of time.

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be
adjusted. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
LIC3188 To turn on the autolight system: LIC2237
Autolight system (if so equipped) ∙ Place the headlight switch in the AUTO Be sure you do not put anything on top
The autolight system allows the headlights position 䊊
1 . of the autolight sensor located in the top
side of the instrument panel 䊊 1 . The au-
to turn on and off automatically. The auto- ∙ Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
light system can: tion. is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, ∙ The autolight system automatically if it is dark out and the headlights will
tail, license plate and instrument panel turns the headlights on and off. illuminate. If this occurs while parked
lights automatically when it is dark. with the engine off and the ignition
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF switch placed in the ON position, your
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light. and a door is opened and left open, the vehicle’s battery could become dis-
headlights remain ON for a period of time. If charged.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time another door is opened while the head-
after you place the ignition switch in the lights are on, then the timer is reset.
OFF position and all doors are closed.
To turn the autolight system off, place the
switch in the OFF, , or position.

2-40 Instruments and controls

 Battery saver system LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF (DRL) SYSTEM
position while the headlight switch is in The LED portion of the headlights auto-
the or position, the headlights matically illuminate at 100% intensity when
will turn off after a period of time. the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. The LED Daytime Running
NOTE: Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position. When you turn
The Battery Saver system may be dis-
abled. For additional information, refer the headlight switch to the position
to “Vehicle information display” in this for full illumination, the LED lights switch
section. from LED DRL to the park function.
If the parking brake is applied before the
CAUTION engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-
nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the
LIC3250
Even though the battery saver feature parking brake is released. The LED DRL re-
Headlight beam select automatically turns off the headlights main on until the ignition is placed in the
after a period of time, you should turn
䊊
1 To select the high beam function, push the headlight switch to the OFF position
OFF position.
the lever forward while the low beams when the engine is not running to avoid It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
are on. The high beam lights come on discharging the vehicle battery. switch on for interior controls and switches
and the indicator light illumi- to illuminate, as those remain off while the
nates. switch is in the OFF position.
䊊
2 Pull the lever back to return to the low
WARNING
beam.
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
䊊
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
the headlight high beams on and off. necessary at dusk to turn on your head-
The low beams do not need to be on lights. Failure to do so could cause an
for this to function. accident injuring yourself and others.

Instruments and controls 2-41

 Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.

LIC2389 LIC3252
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
CONTROL
Turn signal
Press the “+” button 䊊A to increase the
brightness of instrument panel lights. 䊊
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
Press the “-” button 䊊B to decrease the
completed, the turn signal cancels au-
brightness of instrument panel lights. tomatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2 Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.

2-42 Instruments and controls

 HORN

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are se-
lected.

LIC3256 LIC2227
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so To sound the horn, push the center pad
equipped) area of the steering wheel.

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the head-

light switch to the position, then ro-
tate the fog light switch to the posi-
tion.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then rotate the fog light switch
to the position.
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-43

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCHES (if so equipped)

CAUTION The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seat by a built-in
∙ The battery could run down if the cli- heater or ventilates air into the seat. The
mate control seat is operated while climate control switch is located on the
the engine is not running. center console.
∙ Do not use the climate control seat for The climate controlled seat can be oper-
extended periods or when no one is ated as follows:
using the seat.
1. Start the engine.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, 2. Turn the control knob 䊊 A to the heat
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, side 䊊 1 or the cool side 䊊
2 . The indica-
the seat may become overheated. tor light 䊊
B on the control knob will illu-
minate.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
LIC4078 the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar 3. Adjust the desired intensity using the
objects. This may result in damage to control knob.
WARNING the climate controlled seat. 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
Do not use or allow occupants to use ∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should or cooled, or before you leave the ve-
the climate controlled seats if you or the be removed immediately with a dry hicle, be sure to turn the control knob
occupants can not monitor seat tem- cloth to the OFF (center) position. The indica-
peratures or have an inability to feel tor light 䊊
B on the control knob goes off
pain in those body parts in contact with ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use with the switch in the OFF (center) po-
the seat. Use of the climate controlled gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any sition.
seats by such people could result in se- similar materials.
rious injury. ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
climate controlled seat does not oper-
ate, turn the switch off and have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

2-44 Instruments and controls

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)

CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is 1. Start the engine.
not running. 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex- as desired. The indicator light in the
tended periods or when no one is us- switch will illuminate.
ing the seat. The heater is controlled by a thermo-
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which stat, automatically turning the heater
insulates heat, such as a blanket, on and off. The indicator light will re-
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, main on as long as the switch is on.
the seat may become overheated. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
LIC3037 on the seat or pierce it with a pin or switch to turn it off.
similar object. This may result in dam-
WARNING age to the heater.
Do not use or allow occupants to use ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
the seat heater if you or the occupants should be removed immediately with
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- a dry cloth.
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
the seat heater by such people could gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
result in serious injury. similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-45

HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES (if
so equipped)

WARNING ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
Do not use or allow occupants to use
similar materials.
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
tures or have an inability to feel pain in heated seat does not operate, turn
body parts that contact the seat. Use of the switch off and have the system
the seat heater by such people could checked. It is recommended that you
result in serious injury. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC3037
∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-
The 2nd row seats are warmed by built-in
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat. heaters. The switches are located on the
rear of the front center console and can be
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which operated independently of each other.
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, 1. Start the engine.
the seat may become overheated. 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy as desired. The indicator light in the
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or switch will illuminate.
similar object. This may result in dam-
age to the heater. The heater is controlled by a thermo-
stat, automatically turning the heater
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat on and off. The indicator light will re-
should be removed immediately with main on as long as the switch is on.
a dry cloth.

2-46 Instruments and controls

 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH
TYPE A (if so equipped)

3. When the seat is warmed or before you Push the switch again to turn the heated
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the steering wheel system off manually. The
switch off. indicator light will go off.

NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steer-
ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the
switch is turned on, the system will not
heat the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction.

LIC0421
The heated steering wheel system is de-
signed to operate only when the surface
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.

Instruments and controls 2-47

HEATED STEERING WHEEL TYPE B (if VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
so equipped) OFF SWITCH

Touch the key again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off.

NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steer-
ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the
key is touched, the system will not heat
the steering wheel. This is not a malfunc-
tion.

LIC4178 LIC3344
The heated steering wheel system is de- The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
signed to operate only when the surface system on for most driving conditions.
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C). If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
Press the CLIMATE button to access the reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
heated steering wheel key. Touch the be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
heated steering wheel key 䊊 1 to warm the
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
steering wheel after the engine starts. The power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
indicator light will come on.
turn the VDC system off.
If the surface temperature of the steering
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and OFF switch. The indicator light and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as system warning light will come on.
long as the system is on.
2-48 Instruments and controls
 HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

∙ The hill descent control may not con-
the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
trol the vehicle speed on a hill under
tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
all load or road conditions. Always be
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
prepared to depress the brake pedal
ing and driving” section of this manual.
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.

CAUTION
When the hill descent control system
operates continuously for a long time,
the temperature of the brake pads may
increase and the hill descent control
LIC3435 system may be temporarily disabled
(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-
WARNING cator light does not come on continu-
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent ously after blinking, stop using the
control system to control vehicle system.
speed when driving on steep downhill The hill descent control system is designed
grades. Always drive carefully when to reduce driver workload when going
using the hill descent control system down steep hills. The hill descent control
and decelerate the vehicle speed by
system helps to control vehicle speed so
depressing the brake pedal if neces-
the driver can concentrate on steering the
sary. Be especially careful when driv-
ing on frozen, muddy or extremely vehicle.
steep downhill roads. Failure to con- To activate the hill descent control system:
trol vehicle speed may result in a loss
of control of the vehicle and possible ∙ the 4WD switch must be in the LOCK
serious injury or death. position and the vehicle speed must be
under 15 mph (25 km/h)
Instruments and controls 2-49
 REAR DOOR ALERT

∙ the hill descent control system switch The Rear Door Alert system functions un- When the Rear Door Alert system is acti-
must be ON. der certain conditions to indicate there vated:
The hill descent control system ON indica- may be an object or passenger in the rear
∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P
tor light will come on when the system is seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the
(Park) position, a notification message
activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illumi- vehicle.
appears in the vehicle information dis-
nate while the hill descent control system The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis- play with the options to “Dismiss Mes-
applies the brakes to control vehicle speed. abled. The driver can enable the system sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is de- using the vehicle information display. For
∙ Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily
pressed while the hill descent control sys- additional information, refer to “Vehicle in-
disable for that stop.
tem is on, the system will stop operating formation display warnings and indicators”
temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or in this section. ∙ No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will
brake pedal is released, the hill descent keep the alert enabled for that stop.
control system begins to function again if When the system is enabled:
the hill descent control operating condi- ∙ If the alert is enabled when a driver exits
∙ The system is activated when a rear
tions are fulfilled. the vehicle, a message will appear in the
door is opened and closed approxi-
vehicle information display that states
The hill descent control system ON indica- mately 10 minutes before the vehicle is
“Check Back Seat for All Articles.”
tor light blinks if the switch is on and all started. When the vehicle is started and
conditions for system activation are not the system is activated, a visual mes- If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected:
met or if the system becomes disengaged sage appears in the vehicle information
∙ An audible horn sound will occur af-
for any reason. display. For additional information, refer
ter a short time unless a rear door is
to “Rear Door Alert is activated” in this
To turn off the hill descent control system, opened and closed within a short
section.
push the switch to the OFF position. time to deactivate the alert.
For additional information, refer to “Hill de- ∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but
∙ If the doors are locked before the
scent control system ON indicator light” in the vehicle is not started within approxi-
alert is deactivated by opening a rear
this section and “Hill descent control sys- mately 10 minutes, the system will not
door, the horn will sound.
tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of be activated. A rear door must be
this manual. opened and closed and the car started ∙ If the liftgate is opened before a rear
within 10 minutes for the system to ac- door is opened, the horn will be de-
tivate. layed until after the liftgate is closed.
2-50 Instruments and controls
 WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so
equipped)

NOTE: NOTE:
If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the There may be times when the horn
message alert will still be shown in the sounds but there are no objects or pas-
vehicle information display but the horn sengers in the rear seat(s).
will not sound. For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert is activated” in this section.
WARNING
∙ If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no
audible alert will be provided regard-
less of rear door open/close status.
∙ There may be times when there is an
object or passenger in the rear seat(s)
but the audible alert does not sound.
LSD2208
For example, this may occur if the en-
gine is turned off and then on again in The warning systems switch is used to turn
a short period of time during a trip, or on and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
if rear seat passengers enter or exit system that is activated using the settings
the vehicle during a trip. menu on the vehicle information display.
∙ The system does not directly detect When the warning systems switch is
objects or passengers in the rear turned off, the indicator 䊊 1 on the switch is
seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a off. The indicator will also be off if the warn-
rear door is opened and closed, indi- ing system is deactivated using the set-
cating that there may be something in tings menu.
the rear seat(s). The BSW system will turn on the side indi-
cator light, located next to the outside mir-
rors, if the radar detects a vehicle in the
detection zone. If the turn signal is acti-
vated in the direction of the detected ve-
hicle, a chime sounds twice and the side
Instruments and controls 2-51
 POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)

indicator light will flash. For additional infor- CAUTION

mation, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this ∙ Use power outlets with the engine
manual. running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Do not attempt to use this while
driving.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory, doing
so could significantly drain the bat-
tery of your vehicle.

LIC2231
To use the outlets for devices that require
120v power, place the ignition in the ON
position and push the power inverter
switch.
The switch will illuminate when enabled.

2-52 Instruments and controls

TOW MODE SWITCH E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so
equipped)

TOW mode is automatically canceled when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF po-
sition.

LIC3343 LIC3357
TOW mode should be used when pulling a The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina-
heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv- tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub-
ing the vehicle in the TOW mode with no scription to call for assistance in case of an
trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not emergency.
cause any damage. However, fuel
Pressing the button will (with a paid sub-
economy may be reduced, and the
scription) reach a response specialist that
transmission/engine driving characteris-
will provide assistance based on the situa-
tics may feel unusual.
tion described by the vehicle’s occupant. For
Push the TOW mode switch to activate additional information, or to enroll your ve-
TOW mode. The indicator light on the in- hicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect
strument panel illuminates when TOW or call 855–426–6628.
mode is selected. Push the TOW mode
switch again to turn TOW mode OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-53

POWER OUTLETS

LIC3345 LIC3737 LIC2236

Instrument Panel Center Console (if so equipped) Cargo Area (if so equipped)
12V OUTLETS CAUTION ∙ Do not use double adapters or more
The power outlets are for powering electri- than one electrical accessory.
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
cal accessories such as cellular tele- or immediately after use. ∙ Use power outlets with the engine
phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) running to avoid discharging the ve-
maximum. ∙ Only certain power outlets are de-
hicle battery.
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
The instrument panel and center console unit. Do not use any other power out- ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
power outlets are powered only when the let for an accessory lighter. It is rec- air conditioner, headlights, or rear
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. ommended that you visit a NISSAN window defroster is on.
dealer for additional information.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
∙ Do not use with accessories that ex- plug, be sure the electrical accessory
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. being used is turned off.

2-54 Instruments and controls

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
good contact is not made, the plug air conditioner, headlights or rear win-
may overheat or the internal tem- dow defroster is on.
perature fuse may open.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the plug, be sure the electrical accessory
cap. Do not allow water or any other being used is turned OFF.
liquid to contact the outlet.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
LIC2407 liquid to contact the outlet.
2nd Row
120V OUTLET (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Do not use accessories that exceed a
120V, 150W power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one
electrical accessory.

Instruments and controls 2-55

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

LDI2758 LIC3266 LIC3268

The extended storage switch is used when Pulled position Pushed position
the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is
located in the fuse panel to the left of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel. If
any electrical equipment does not operate,
ensure the extended storage switch is
pushed fully in place, as shown.

2-56 Instruments and controls

STORAGE

LIC3546 LIC2392 LIC2618

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS
There is one seatback pocket located on
the back of the driver and passenger seats.
The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.

Instruments and controls 2-57

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.

LIC3282 LIC2214
Front console Rear armrest
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

2-58 Instruments and controls

 LIC3003 LIC1026 LIC0702
GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX Lower half
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, press in on the Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to
Use the master key when locking or un- lever 䊊
1 and raise the lid 䊊
2 . open the lower half of the console box. A
locking the glove box. power outlet is located inside the console
To close, push the lid down until the lock
box and there is storage for compact discs.
latches.
WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driv- Upper half
ing to help prevent injury in an accident Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
or a sudden stop. upper half of the console box.
The upper half of the console box may be
used for storage of cellular phones. An ac-
cess hole is provided at the front of the
upper half of the console box for a phone or
iPod® cord routing to the power outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-59
 CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC2312 LIC3486

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES Front console

STORAGE CUP HOLDERS
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.

2-60 Instruments and controls

 LIC2395 LIC2212 LIC2242
Rear door 2nd row 3rd row
WARNING WARNING
Do not recline the rear seatback when Avoid abrupt starting and braking
you use the cup holders on the rear when the cup holder is being used to
armrest. Doing so may cause the bever- prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
ages to spill over, and if they are hot, hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
they may scald the passengers.
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-61

 LIC2393 LIC2394 LIC2244
Bottle holder — front Bottle holder — rear Type A (if so equipped)
CAUTION CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any To access the floor storage area (Type A),
other objects that could be thrown push down 䊊 1 to raise the handle, then pull
about in the vehicle and possibly in- up on the handle to lift the luggage board.
jure people during sudden braking or To access the floor storage area (Type B),
an accident. raise the handle.
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open
liquid containers.

2-62 Instruments and controls

 WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-
cure cargo.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-
LIC3513 LIC3684
hicle. In a collision, people riding in
Type B (if so equipped) these areas are more likely to be seri-
LUGGAGE HOOKS ously injured or killed.
When securing items using luggage hooks ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
located on the side finisher do not apply a of your vehicle that is not equipped
load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a with seats and seat belts.
single hook. ∙ The child restraint top tether strap
The luggage hooks that are located on the may be damaged by contact with
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. items in the cargo area. Secure any
(490 N) to a single hook. items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
The luggage hooks can be used to secure collision if the top tether strap is
cargo with ropes or other types of straps. damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

Instruments and controls 2-63

 Be careful that your vehicle does not ex- ∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has
ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the potential to affect the vehicle sta-
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating bility and handling during sudden or
(GAWR front and rear). unusual handling maneuvers.
For additional information regarding GVWR ∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
and GAWR, refer to: distributed.
∙ “Vehicle loading information” or the “Di- ∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack
mensions and weights” table in the cross bars load capacity.
“Technical and consumer information” ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
section of this manual. straps to help prevent it from sliding
∙ F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-
(located on the driver’s door pillar) (if so sion, unsecured cargo could cause
LIC2386 equipped) personal injury.
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
∙ Always install the cross bars onto the
side rails. Cross bars must be installed be-
roof side rails before loading cargo of
fore applying load/cargo/luggage to the
any kind. Loading cargo directly onto
roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN acces-
the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof
sory cross bars are available through a
may cause vehicle damage.
NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for additional informa- ∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
tion. is loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
The service load capacity for the roof side
portion of that load is carried on the
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not ex-
cross bars.
ceed the cross bars load capacity.

2-64 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS Driver’s side power window

switch
WARNING
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
∙ Make sure that all passengers have with switches to open or close all of the
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle windows.
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock To open a window, push the switch to the
switch to prevent unexpected use of detent and continue to hold down until the
the power windows. desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the de-
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death tent and continue to hold up until the de-
through unintended operation of the sired window position is reached.
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver- Locking passengers’ windows
tent door lock activation, do not leave LIC3208
When the window lock switch is depressed,
children, people who require the as- 1. Window lock button only the driver’s side window can be
sistance of others or pets unattended 2. Power door lock switch opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- 3. Front passenger side switch the window lock function.
perature inside a closed vehicle on a 4. Right rear passenger side switch
warm day can quickly become high
5. Left rear passenger side switch
enough to cause a significant risk of
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.

Instruments and controls 2-65

 LIC2309 LIC2663 LIC0410
Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch Automatic operation (if so
switch The rear power window switches open or equipped)
The passenger’s window switch operates close only the corresponding windows. To To fully open a window equipped with au-
only the corresponding passenger’s win- open the window, push the switch and hold tomatic operation, press the window
dow. To open the window partially, push the it down 䊊1 . To close the window, pull the
switch down to the second detent and re-
switch down 䊊 1 lightly until the desired switch up 䊊2 .
lease it; it need not be held. The window
window position is reached. To close the automatically opens all the way. To stop
window partially, pull the switch up 䊊
2 until
the window, lift the switch up while the win-
the desired window position is reached.
dow is opening.

2-66 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function (if so When power window switch does If the power window function does not op-
equipped) not operate erate properly after performing the above
procedure have the system checked and
The auto-reverse function can be acti- If the power window automatic function repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
vated when a window is closed by auto- (closing only) does not operate properly, NISSAN dealer for this service.
matic operation. perform the following procedure to initial-
ize the power window system:
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
tion may be activated if an impact or sition.
load similar to something being caught 2. Open the window more than halfway
in the window occurs. by operating the power window switch.

WARNING 3. Pull the power window switch and hold

it to close the window, and then hold
There are some small distances imme- the switch more than 3 seconds after
diately before the closed position which the window is closed.
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in- 4. Release the power window switch. Op-
side the vehicle before closing the erate the window by the automatic
window. function to confirm the initialization is
complete. The power window auto-
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re- matically opens or closes depending
placed, or jump started, the power window on if the automatic down or up func-
auto-reverse function may not operate tion is selected.
properly. If this occurs, please contact the
dealer to re-initialize the power window 5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
auto-reverse system. other windows.

If the control unit detects something

caught in a window equipped with auto-
matic operation, as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.
Instruments and controls 2-67
DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so
equipped)

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once If the moonroof does not operate properly
more while it is opening or closing. after performing the procedure above,
have your vehicle checked. It is recom-
Tilting the moonroof mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then this service.
push the switch to the tilt up position 䊊1
Auto-reverse function (when
and release it; it need not be held. To tilt
down the moonroof, push the switch to the closing or tilting down the
tilt down position 䊊 2 . moonroof)
Resetting the moonroof switch The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when the moonroof is closed or
If the moonroof does not operate properly, tilted down by automatic operation when
perform the following procedure to initial- the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
LIC2313 ize the moonroof operation system. sition or for a period of time after the igni-
POWER MOONROOF 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- tion switch is placed in the OFF position.
sition. Depending on the environment or driv-
The moonroof will only operate when the ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
ignition switch is in the ON position. The 2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch tion may be activated if an impact or
power moonroof is operational for a period forward until the moonroof stops. load similar to something being caught
of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the moonroof occurs.
in the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s 3. Release the moonroof switch.
door or the front passenger’s door is 4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within WARNING
opened during this period of time, the 6 seconds.
power to the moonroof is canceled. There are some small distances imme-
5. The roof glass will tilt-down, slide-close, diately before the closed position which
Sliding the moonroof slide-open, slide-close, tilt-up, tilt- cannot be detected. Make sure that all
down. passengers have their hands, etc., in-
To fully open or close the moonroof, push
the switch to the open 䊊 1 or close 䊊
2 posi- 6. Release the switch; initialization is side the vehicle before closing the
tion and release it; it need not be held. The complete if the moonroof operates moonroof.
roof will automatically open or close all the normally.
2-68 Instruments and controls
When closing CAUTION
If the control unit detects something ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the sand from the moonroof before
front, the moonroof will immediately open opening.
backward.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
When tilting down moonroof or surrounding area.
If the control unit detects something Sunshade
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up. Open and close the sunshade by sliding it
forward or backward.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the If the moonroof does not close
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down Have your moonroof checked and re- LIC2228
switch within 5 seconds after it happens; paired. It is recommended that you visit a
the moonroof will fully close gradually. NISSAN dealer for this service. Panoramic sunshade
Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-
The panoramic sunshade operates when
roof.
the ignition switch is in the ON position. The
sunshade switch is located near the roof
WARNING
console. When opening or closing the sun-
∙ In an accident you could be thrown shade the switch need not be held.
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and To open the sunshade:
child restraints. ∙ To fully open the sunshade, push the
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or switch 䊊 1 toward the open position.
extend any portion of their body out To close the sunshade:
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the ∙ To fully close the sunshade, push the
moonroof is closing. switch 䊊 2 toward the close position.

Instruments and controls 2-69

 WARNING ∙ Do not put any object into the sun- 5. Sunshade drive cable will travel in the
shade inlet port as this may result in open direction for .394 in. (10 mm) then
∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your reverse direction and stop at the nor-
improper operation or damage the
hands, fingers and head away from mal close position.
sunshade.
the sunshade arm, the arm rail and
sunshade inlet port. ∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail 6. Release the sunshade close switch. Ini-
as this may result in improper opera- tialization procedure is complete.
∙ Do not allow children near the rear
tion or damage the sunshade.
sunshade system. They could be If the moonroof does not operate properly
injured. ∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. after performing the procedure above,
Doing so may elongate the sunshade. have your vehicle serviced. It is recom-
∙ Do not place objects on or near the
Improper operation or damage to the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
rear sunshade. This could cause im-
sunshade may result. this service.
proper operation or damage it.
∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. Restarting the sunshade switch Auto-reverse function (when closing
This could cause improper operation If the sunshade does not operate properly, the sunshade)
or damage it. perform the following procedure to initial- The auto-reverse function can be acti-
ize the sunshade operation system. vated when the sunshade is closed by au-
CAUTION tomatic operation when the ignition switch
1. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or
∙ Do not place objects (such as newspa- ON position. is placed in the ON position or for a period
pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun- of time after the ignition switch is placed in
shade inlet port. Doing so may en- 2. Push and hold the sunshade close the OFF position.
tangle these objects in the sunshade switch.
when it is extending or retracting, Depending on the environment or driv-
causing improper operation or dam- 3. Sunshade will begin moving towards ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
age to the sunshade. the close position only while the switch tion may be activated if an impact or
is continually held. (this disables the ob- load similar to something being caught
∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with stacle detection). in the sunshade occurs.
your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
Improper operation or damage to the 4. Sunshade will stop for about 4 sec-
sunshade may result. onds.

2-70 Instruments and controls

 INTERIOR LIGHTS

WARNING NOTE:

There are some small distances imme- The footwell lights (if so equipped) and
diately before the closed position which step lights (if so equipped) illuminate
cannot be detected. Make sure that all when the driver and passenger doors
of the passengers have their hands, are open regardless of the interior light
etc., inside the vehicle before closing switch position. These lights will turn off
the sunshade. automatically after a period of time
while doors are open to prevent the bat-
tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
LIC2302 sult in a discharged battery.
When the ON switch 䊊 1 is pressed, the foot-
well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal
lights will automatically turn on and stay on
for a period of time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelli-
gent Key, a key or the request switch (if
so equipped) while all doors are closed
and the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
∙ When individually pushed.
When the OFF switch 䊊 2 is pushed, the in-
terior lights do not illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-71

 LIC2303 LIC2304 LIC1413
CONSOLE LIGHT MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS
The console light will turn on whenever the Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn on the personal lights, push and
parking lights or headlights are illuminated. To turn them off, press the button again. release the switch 䊊
1 .

The console light brightness can be ad- To turn off the personal lights, push and
justed with the illumination brightness
CAUTION release the switch 䊊
1 .
control. Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.

2-72 Instruments and controls

 HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

CAUTION The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the
Do not use for extended periods of time functions of up to three individual hand-
with the engine stopped. This could re- held transmitters into one built-in device.
sult in a discharged battery.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-
vices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
SIC2063A connected, HomeLink® will retain all
CARGO LIGHT programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a
ceiver is programmed, retain the original
three-position switch. To operate, push the
transmitter for future programming pro-
switch to the desired position.
cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-
䊊
1 ON: The light is illuminated. chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
䊊
2 DOOR: The light illuminates when the
programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
liftgate is opened. The light turns off
security purposes. For additional infor-
when the liftgate is closed.
mation, refer to “Programming
䊊
3 OFF: The light does not illuminate re- HomeLink®” in this section.
gardless of liftgate position or lock sta-
tus.

Instruments and controls 2-73

 WARNING ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do
Transceiver with any garage door
not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
tain colorless and odorless carbon
verse features as required by federal
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
safety standards. (These standards
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness
became effective for opener models
or death.
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A
garage door opener which cannot de- PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
tect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically If you have any questions or are having
stop and reverse, does not meet cur- difficulty programming your HomeLink®
rent federal safety standards. Using a buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
garage door opener without these www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
LIC2365
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death. NOTE: 1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
∙ During the programming procedure Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi- the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
your garage door or security gate will tion when programming HomeLink®. It is HomeLink® indicator light 䊊1 in view.
open and close (if the transmitter is also recommended that a new battery
within range). Make sure that people be placed in the hand-held transmitter
or objects are clear of the garage door, of the device being programmed to
gate, etc. that you are programming. HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.

2-74 Instruments and controls

 NOTE: 4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, lo-
Some devices may require you to replace
cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
name and color of the button may vary
in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-
by manufacturer but it is usually lo-
dian customers and gate openers” in this
cated near where the hanging an-
section.
tenna wire is attached to the unit). If
3. Press and hold the programmed there is difficulty locating the button,
HomeLink® button and observe the in- reference the garage door opener’s
dicator light. manual.
∙ If the indicator light 䊊 1 is 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
solid/continuous, programming is button.
complete and your device should
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
activate when the HomeLink® button
LIC2366 and hold the trained HomeLink® but-
is pressed and released.
ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
1 blinks rapidly the “press/hold/release” sequence up
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
for 2 seconds and then turns to a to three times to complete the training
button and hand-held transmitter but- process. HomeLink® should now acti-
solid/continuous light, continue
ton. DO NOT release until the with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de- vate your rolling code equipped device.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 1 flashes
vice. A second person may make the
slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- 7. If you have any questions or are having
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons difficulty programming your
other device. Do not stand on your
may be released. (The rapid flashing HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
vehicle to perform the next steps.
indicates successful programming.) HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.

Instruments and controls 2-75

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR During training, your hand-held trans- For convenience, the hand-held transmit-
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE mitter may automatically stop transmit- ter of the device may also be used at any
ting. Continue to press and hold the de- time.
OPENERS sired HomeLink® button while you press
Canadian radio-frequency laws require and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) transmitter every 2 seconds until the fre- DIAGNOSIS
after several seconds of transmission – quency signal has been learned. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
which may not be long enough for hand-held transmitter information:
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during slowly and then rapidly after several sec-
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some onds upon successful training. DO NOT ∙ replace the hand-held transmitter bat-
U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim- release until the HomeLink® indicator teries with new batteries.
eout” in the same manner. light flashes slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, ∙ position the hand-held transmitter with
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- both buttons may be released. The rapid its battery area facing away from the
culties training a gate operator or garage flashing indicates successful training. HomeLink® surface.
door opener by using the “Training” proce- Proceed with “Programming ∙ press and hold both the HomeLink®
dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. and hand-held transmitter buttons
step 2 with the following: If the device was unplugged during the without interruption.
programming procedure, remember to
NOTE: plug it back in when programming is ∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 -
completed. 3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the
When programming a garage door opener,
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-
etc., unplug the device during the “cycling” OPERATING THE HOMELINK® ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
process to prevent possible damage to the UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER If HomeLink® is not programmed within
garage door opener components.
that time, try holding the transmitter in
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it
1. For additional information, refer to “Pro- another position – keeping the indicator
is programmed, can be used to activate the
gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this light in view at all times.
programmed device. To operate, simply
section.
press and release the appropriate pro- If you have any questions or are having
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press grammed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver difficulty programming your HomeLink®
and hold the desired HomeLink® button button. The amber indicator light will illumi- buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
and the hand-held transmitter button. nate while the signal is being transmitted. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
2-76 Instruments and controls
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED 2. The indicator light will begin to flash FCC Notice:
INFORMATION after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
For USA:
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-
The following procedure clears the pro- gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1. This device complies with Part 15 of the
grammed information from both buttons. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
For questions or comments, contact
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How- lowing two conditions: (1) This device
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
ever, individual buttons can be repro- may not cause harmful interference, and
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
grammed. For additional information, refer (2) this device must accept any interfer-
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- ence received, including interference
button” in this section. ton has now been reprogrammed. The that may cause undesired operation.
new device can be activated by pressing
To clear all programming: the HomeLink® button that was just pro- NOTE:
1. Press and hold the two outer grammed. This procedure will not affect
Changes or modifications not expressly
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator any other programmed HomeLink® but-
approved by the party responsible for
light begins to flash in approximately tons.
compliance could void the user’s author-
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN ity to operate the equipment.
20 seconds.
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change For Canada:
2. Release both buttons. the codes of any non-rolling code device This device complies with Industry
HomeLink® is now in the programming that has been programmed into Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
mode and can be programmed at any HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of Operation is subject to the following two
time beginning with “Programming each device or call the manufacturer or conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink®” - Step 1. dealer of those devices for additional infor- interference, and (2) this device must ac-
mation. cept any received, including interference
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE that may cause undesired operation of
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
HOMELINK® BUTTON need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- the device.
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal versal Transceiver with your new trans-
Transceiver button, complete the following: mitter information.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
Instruments and controls 2-77
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-29
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
NISSAN Intelligent Key® With Door and Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Liftgate Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Operating the manual liftgate
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Operating the power liftgate
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
How to use the remote keyless entry Motion-Activated Liftgate
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Liftgate position setting
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Without Door and (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Liftgate Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
How to use the remote keyless entry Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
 Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-42 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-48
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror Setting memory function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
KEYS

LPD2842 LPD2844 LPD2941

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped)
1. Two Intelligent Keys Never leave these keys in the vehicle. A key number plate is supplied with your
2. Mechanical key As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
3. Key number plate registered and used with one vehicle. The a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
new keys must be registered by a NISSAN vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer duplicates by using the key number.
Your vehicle can only be driven with the System of your vehicle. Since the registra- NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
Intelligent Keys which are registered to tion process requires erasing all memory in is very important to keep track of your key
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com- the Intelligent Key components when reg- number plate.
ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-
System components. A key number is only necessary when you
gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
have lost all keys and do not have one to
dealer.
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 CAUTION ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
Listed below are conditions or occur-
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
rences which will damage the Intelli-
and personal computers.
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
contains electrical components, to recommends erasing the ID code of that
come into contact with water or salt Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
water. This could affect the system prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
function. gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key dealer.
sharply against another object.
SPA1951
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key. Mechanical key
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- cal key.
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry. To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door and glove box.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

 CAUTION NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ter the registration process, these compo-
SYSTEM KEYS nents will only recognize keys coded into
Always carry the mechanical key in- the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
stalled in the Intelligent Key slot. You can only drive your vehicle using the during registration. Any key that is not
master or valet keys which are registered given to the dealer at the time of registra-
For additional information, refer to “Doors”
to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System tion will no longer be able to start your
in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru-
components in your vehicle. These keys vehicle.
ments and controls” section of this manual.
have a transponder chip in the key head.
Valet hand-off CAUTION
The master key can be used for all the
When you have to leave a key with a valet, locks. Do not allow the immobilizer system
give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep key, which contains an electrical tran-
the mechanical key with you to protect To protect your belongings when you leave sponder, to come into contact with wa-
your belongings. a key with someone, give them the Intelli- ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
gent Key only, not the mechanical key. tem function.
To prevent the glove box from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
procedure below.
Additional or replacement keys:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
If you still have a key, the key number is not
Intelligent Key.
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
2. Lock the glove box with the mechani- Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
cal key. isting key can be duplicated without know-
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet ing the key number. As many as four
and keep the mechanical key with you. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
For additional information, refer to “Stor- bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN
tion of this manual. dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
of all key codes previously registered into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
DOORS

When the doors are locked using one of the

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
following methods, the front doors cannot through unintended operation of the
be opened using the outside door handles, vehicle and or its systems, including
and the back doors cannot be opened us- entrapment in windows or inadver-
ing the inside or outside door handles. The tent door lock activation, do not leave
doors must be unlocked to open the doors. children, people who require the as-
sistance of others or pets unattended
WARNING in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
∙ Always have the doors locked while perature inside a closed vehicle on a
driving. Along with the use of seat warm day can quickly become high
belts, this provides greater safety in enough to cause a significant risk of
the event of an accident by helping to injury or death to people and pets.
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep LPD2841
children and others from unintention-
Driver’s side
ally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders. LOCKING WITH KEY
∙ Before opening any door, always look To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
for and avoid oncoming traffic. shown.
Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle 䊊 1 . To unlock, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊 2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

 Opening and closing windows (if
so equipped)
The driver’s door key operation allows you
to open and close windows equipped with
automatic operation at the same time.
∙ To open the windows, turn the driver’s
door key toward the rear of the vehicle
for longer than 1 second.
∙ To close the windows, turn the driver’s
door key toward the front of the vehicle
for longer than 1 second.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is re-
LPD2942 LPD2641
leased.
Power (if so equipped) Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time. To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊 1 ,
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1 of the then close the door.
vehicle locks all doors.
To unlock the door without the key, move
Turning the key one time toward the rear the inside lock knob to the unlock position
䊊2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From 䊊2 .
that position, returning the key to neutral
For front doors, the door can also be un-
䊊3 (where the key can only be removed and
locked by pulling on the inside handle lever
inserted) and turning it toward the rear one time 䊊3 .
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
䊊4 .

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position and any door is open, all
doors will lock. With the Intelligent Key left in
the vehicle and any door open, all doors will
unlock automatically and a chime will
sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelli-
gent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
LPD2309 vehicle speed reaches 15 mph LPD2374
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR (24 km/h). CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
LOCK SWITCH ∙ All doors unlock automatically when the Child safety locks help prevent the rear
To lock all the doors without a key, push the transmission is placed in the P (Park) doors from being opened accidentally, es-
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- position or when the ignition switch is pecially when small children are in the ve-
ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊 1 . When placed in the OFF position. hicle.
locking the door this way, be certain not to The child safety lock levers are located on
leave the key inside the vehicle. NOTE:
the edge of the rear doors.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of When the lever is in the LOCK position,
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas- the door can be opened only from the
senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊2 . the vehicle information display. For ad-
outside.
ditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-
formation display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® WITH
DOOR AND LIFTGATE REQUEST
SWITCHES
WARNING CAUTION ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect ∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key computer.
electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehicle.
who use a pacemaker should contact ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the ing meter.
the electric medical equipment
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
manufacturer for the possible influ- In such cases, correct the operating condi-
ences before use. The Intelligent Key is always communicat- tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
ing with the vehicle as it receives radio tion or use the mechanical key.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak
waves when the buttons are pressed.
radio waves. Environmental conditions Although the life of the battery varies de-
The FAA advises the radio waves may
may interfere with the operation of the In- pending on the operating conditions, the
affect aircraft navigation and com-
telligent Key under the following operating battery’s life is approximately two years. If
munication systems. Do not operate
conditions: the battery is discharged, replace it with a
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
new one.
plane. Make sure the buttons are not ∙ When operating near a location where
operated unintentionally when the strong radio waves are transmitted, When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
unit is stored for a flight. such as a TV tower, power station and indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa-
broadcasting station. tion display. For additional information, re-
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door fer to “Vehicle information display” in the
locks using the remote control function or ∙ When in possession of wireless equip- “Instruments and controls” section of this
pushing the request switch on the vehicle ment, such as a cellular telephone, manual.
without taking the key out from a pocket or transceiver or a CB radio.
purse. The operating environment and/or Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key with or covered by metallic materials.
operation. equipment which transmits strong radio
∙ When any type of radio wave remote waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
Be sure to read the following before using control is used nearby. sonal computer, the battery life may be-
the Intelligent Key. come shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
registered and used with one vehicle. For a key holder that contains a magnet.
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
CAUTION and personal computers.

Listed below are conditions or occur- If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
rences which will damage the Intelli- recommends erasing the ID code of that
gent Key: Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
contains electrical components, to mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
come into contact with water or salt is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
water. This could affect the system dealer.
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent LPD2929
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
OPERATING RANGE
dry. The Intelligent Key functions can only be
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an used when the Intelligent Key is within the
extended period in an area where specified operating range from the request
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). switch 䊊1 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- ∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
charged or strong radio waves are present ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you
near the operating location, the Intelligent carry the Intelligent Key with you and
Key operating range becomes narrower, then lock the doors.
and the Intelligent Key may not function
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
properly.
pushing the door handle request
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) switch. The door will be unlocked but
from each request switch 䊊 1 . will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli- LPD2554
gent Key, to push the request switch to DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
lock/unlock the doors. PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close dis-
tance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch, verify the doors are se-
curely locked by testing them.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 LPD2905 LPD2943 LPD2614
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Locking doors NOTE:
OPERATION 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- ∙ Request switches for all doors and
You can lock or unlock the doors without tion, place the ignition switch in the liftgate can be deactivated when the
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket LOCK position and make sure you carry I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to
or bag. the Intelligent Key with you. OFF in the vehicle settings of the ve-
hicle information display. For addi-
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, 2. Close the driver’s door and press the tional information, refer to “Vehicle
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing driver’s door request switch OR close information display” in the “Instru-
the door handle request switch within the all doors and press any door request ments and controls” section of this
range of operation. switch while carrying the Intelligent Key manual.
with you.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle re-
3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock. quest switch while the ignition switch
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice is not in the LOCK position.
and the outside chime sounds twice.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
 ∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door Lockout protection CAUTION
handle request switch while the driv-
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being The lockout protection may not func-
er’s door is open. However, doors lock accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
with the mechanical key even if any tion under the following conditions:
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
door is open. Key system. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
∙ Doors do not lock with the door top of the instrument panel.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
handle request switch with the Intel- doors are locked, and then the Intelligent ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
ligent Key inside the vehicle and a Key is put inside the vehicle and all the side the glove box or a storage bin.
beep sounds to warn you. However, doors are closed; the lock will automati- ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
when an Intelligent Key is inside the cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds. side the door pockets.
vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key. NOTE: ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
CAUTION gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
∙ After locking the doors using the re- erating the request switch to lock the
quest switch, make sure that the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
doors have been securely locked by pocket or your other hand.
operating the door handles or the rear
liftgate opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pushing the
request switch.
∙ Opening any door.
LPD2943 LPD2614 ∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
Unlocking doors NOTE: The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-
Request switches for all doors and lift- riod of time when a door is unlocked and
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
gate can be deactivated when the I-Key the room light switch is in the DOOR posi-
2. Push the door handle request switch or Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in tion.
power liftgate request switch. the “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle in-
The interior light can be turned off without
formation display. For additional infor-
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once waiting by performing one of the following
mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-
and the outside chime sounds once. play” in the “Instruments and controls” operations:
4. Push the door handle request switch section of this manual. ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-
again within 1 minute to unlock all sition.
doors.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-
trol.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
 ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the CAUTION
OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the
vehicle information display. For addi- When locking the doors using the Intel-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle in- ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
formation display” in the “Instruments the vehicle.
and controls” section of this manual.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve- LPD2906
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
The remote keyless entry function will not
position.
function under the following conditions:
2. Close all doors.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range. 3. Press the button on the Intelli-
∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are gent Key.
open or not closed securely. 4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- and the horn beeps once.
charged. 5. All doors will be locked.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 NOTE:
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intel- The unlocking operation can be changed
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have in “Selective Unlock” in “Vehicles Settings”
been securely locked by operating the of the vehicle information display. For ad-
door handles. ditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-
formation display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pressing
the button:
∙ Opening any doors.
LPD2833
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
Unlocking doors The interior light illuminates for a period of
1. Press the button on the Intelligent time when a door is unlocked and the
Key. room light switch is in the DOOR position.

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once. The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following opera-
3. Press the button again within tions:
60 seconds to unlock all doors.
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

 ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the When the button is pressed during
OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the the open or close process, the liftgate mo-
vehicle information display. For addi- tors will stop. When the button is
tional information, refer to “Vehicle in- pressed again, the liftgate will reverse di-
formation display” in the “Instruments rection.
and controls” section of this manual.
Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-
ously open windows equipped with auto-
matic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer
than 3 seconds after all doors are un- LPD2944
locked.
The door windows will open while pressing Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
the button on the Intelligent Key. equipped)
The door windows cannot be closed by The rear liftgate can be opened and closed
using the Intelligent Key. by performing the following:
∙ Press the button for longer than
0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
∙ Press the button again for longer
than 0.5 seconds to close the rear lift-
gate.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-
senger door has been pushed and the
Intelligent Key is in range of the door
handle.
Linking the key fob to automatic
drive positioner memory (if so
equipped)
LPD2945 If the vehicle is equipped with automatic LPD2837
Using the panic alarm drive positioner, the key fob can be linked to Answer back horn feature
a memory setting.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
If desired, the answer back horn feature
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to For additional information, refer to “Auto-
call attention by pressing and holding matic drive positioner” in this section. can be deactivated using the Intelligent
the button on the Intelligent Key for Key. When it is deactivated and the
longer than 0.5 seconds. button is pressed, the hazard indicator
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on lights flash twice. When the button is
for a period of time. pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

NOTE: be replaced. For additional information re-
garding the replacement of a battery, refer
If you change the answer back horn and
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
light flash feature with the Intelligent
yourself” section of this manual.
Key, the vehicle information display
screen will show the current mode after WARNING SIGNALS
the ignition switch has been cycled from
the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle To help prevent the vehicle from moving
information display screen can also be unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
used to change the answer back horn the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
mode. vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
To deactivate: vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.
Press and hold the and but-
tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
LPD2836
indicator lights will flash three times to con- is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
firm that the answer back horn feature has Intelligent Key button operation and the Intelligent Key.
been deactivated. light For additional information, refer to the
To activate: “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
The light blinks only when you push any
button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu- “Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-
Press and hold the and but-
mination only signifies that the key fob has ments and controls” section of this manual.
tons for at least 2 seconds once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once transmitted a signal. You may look and/or TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
and the horn will sound once to confirm listen to verify that the vehicle has per-
that the horn beep feature has been reac- formed the intended operation. The num- Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
tivated. ber of blinks identifies each registered key are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Deactivating the horn beep feature does (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- your own identification purposes. hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-
gered. ferently than expected.
If the light does not blink, your battery may
be too weak to communicate to the ve-
hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The Shift to Park warning appears on Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
When stopping the engine the display and the inside warning position.
position.
chime sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P The Push ignition to OFF warning ap- The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
(Park) position pears in the display. position. position.
The Door Open warning appears on
When opening the driver’s door to get The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
the display and the inside warning
out of the vehicle position. position.
chime sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
sounds three times and the inside
position. position.
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The Rear Door Alert warning message
When closing the door after getting
appears on the display, the horn Check the back seat for all articles,
out of the vehicle
sounds three times twice, or a “Check The Rear Door Alert is activated. press the ENTER button to clear the
Back Seat For All Articles” warning ap- Rear Door Alert warning message.
pears on the display.
The Shift to Park warning appears on The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
the display and the outside chime tion and the shift lever is not in the P sition and place the ignition switch in
sounds continuously. (Park) position. the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
When closing the door with the inside
mately 3 seconds and all the doors The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
lock knob in the lock position
unlock.
When pushing the door handle re-
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
quest switch or the button on The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
mately 2 seconds.
the Intelligent Key to lock the door

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
Replace the battery with a new one.
The Key low battery warning appears For additional information, refer to
The battery charge is low.
on the display. “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
When pushing the ignition switch to
The No Key Detected warning appears
start the engine
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The I-Key System Error warning mes-
It warns of a malfunction with the In- It is recommended that you visit a
When pushing the ignition switch sage in the vehicle information display
telligent Key system. NISSAN dealer.
appears.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® WITHOUT
DOOR AND LIFTGATE REQUEST
SWITCHES
WARNING The Intelligent Key is always communicat- Although the life of the battery varies de-
ing with the vehicle as it receives radio pending on the operating conditions, the
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect elec- waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak battery’s life is approximately two years. If
tric medical equipment. Those who use a radio waves. Environmental conditions the battery is discharged, replace it with a
pacemaker should contact the electric may interfere with the operation of the In- new one.
medical equipment manufacturer for telligent Key under the following operating
the possible influences before use. When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
conditions:
indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa-
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
∙ When operating near a location where tion display. For additional information, re-
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may strong radio waves are transmitted, fer to “Vehicle information display” in the
affect aircraft navigation and com- such as a TV tower, power station and “Instruments and controls” section of this
munication systems. Do not operate broadcasting station. manual.
the Intelligent Key while on an air- ∙ When in possession of wireless equip- Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not ment, such as a cellular telephone, ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
operated unintentionally when the transceiver or a CB radio. equipment which transmits strong radio
unit is stored for a flight. waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door sonal computer, the battery life may be-
with or covered by metallic materials.
locks using the remote control function. The come shorter.
operating environment and/or conditions ∙ When any type of radio wave remote
For additional information, refer to “Battery
may affect the Intelligent Key operation. control is used nearby.
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
Be sure to read the following before using ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near of this manual.
the Intelligent Key. an electric appliance such as a personal
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
computer.
registered and used with one vehicle. For
CAUTION ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park- information about the purchase and use of
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key ing meter. additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
with you when operating the vehicle. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
In such cases, correct the operating condi-
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
vehicle when you leave the vehicle. tion or use the mechanical key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

 If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
CAUTION
recommends erasing the ID code of that KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Listed below are conditions or occur- Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
rences which will damage the Intelli- prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- The remote keyless entry function can op-
gent Key: gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- erate all door locks using the remote key-
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which mation regarding the erasing procedure, it less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
contains electrical components, to is recommended that you visit a NISSAN mote keyless function can operate at a
come into contact with water or salt dealer. distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-
water. This could affect the system hicle. The operating distance depends
OPERATING RANGE upon the conditions around the vehicle.
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. The Intelligent Key functions can only be The remote keyless entry function will not
used when the Intelligent Key is within the function under the following conditions:
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
specified operating range.
sharply against another object. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- operational range.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
charged or strong radio waves are present
gent Key. ∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are
near the operating location, the Intelligent
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes open or not closed securely.
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not ∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
mediately wipe until it is completely function properly. charged.
dry.
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an the vehicle. CAUTION
extended period in an area where
When locking the doors using the Intel-
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with the vehicle.
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.

LPD2906 LPD2833
Locking doors Unlocking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK 1. Press the button on the Intelligent
position. Key.
2. Close all doors. 2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.
3. Press the button on the Intelli- 3. Press the button again within
gent Key. 60 seconds to unlock all doors.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

NOTE: ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the
The unlocking operation can be changed vehicle information display. For addi-
in “Selective Unlock” in “Vehicles Set- tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-
tings” of the vehicle information display. formation display” in the “Instruments
For additional information, refer to “Ve- and controls” section of this manual.
hicle information display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this Opening windows (if so equipped)
manual. The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-
All doors will be locked automatically un- ously open windows equipped with auto-
less one of the following operations is per- matic operation.
formed within 1 minute after pressing ∙ To open the windows, press the
the button: button on the Intelligent Key longer
∙ Opening any doors. than 3 seconds after all doors are un- LPD2944
locked.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch. The door windows will open while pressing Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
The interior light illuminates for a period of the button on the Intelligent Key. equipped)
time when a door is unlocked and the The door windows cannot be closed by The rear liftgate can be opened and closed
room light switch is in the DOOR position. using the Intelligent Key. by performing the following:
The light can be turned off without waiting
∙ Press the button for longer than
by performing one of the following opera-
0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
tions:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- ∙ Press the button again for longer
sition. than 0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.
When the button is pressed during
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent the open or close process, the liftgate mo-
Key.
tors will stop. When the button is
∙ Switching the room light switch to the pressed again, the liftgate will reverse di-
OFF position. rection.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 NOTE:
If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent
Key, the vehicle information display
screen will show the current mode after
the ignition switch has been cycled from
the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle
information display screen can also be
used to change the answer back horn
mode.
To deactivate:

Press and hold the and but-

LPD2945 LPD2837 tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard
indicator lights will flash three times to con-
Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature firm that the answer back horn feature has
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- been deactivated.
If desired, the answer back horn feature
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to To activate:
call attention by pressing and holding can be deactivated using the Intelligent
the button on the Intelligent Key for Key. When it is deactivated and the Press and hold the and but-
longer than 0.5 seconds. button is pressed, the hazard indicator tons for at least 2 seconds once more.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on lights flash twice. When the button is The hazard indicator lights will flash once
for a period of time. pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights and the horn will sound once to confirm
nor the horn operates. that the horn beep feature has been reac-
The panic alarm stops when: tivated.
∙ It has run for a period of time, or Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent gered.
Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

 If the light does not blink, your battery may When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
be too weak to communicate to the ve- is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to and the Intelligent Key.
be replaced. For additional information re-
For additional information, refer to the
garding the replacement of a battery, refer
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-
yourself” section of this manual.
ments and controls” section of this manual.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
LPD2836 vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
Intelligent Key button operation instrument panel.
light
The light blinks only when you push any
button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-
mination only signifies that the key fob has
transmitted a signal. You may look and/or
listen to verify that the vehicle has per-
formed the intended operation. The num-
ber of blinks identifies each registered key
(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for
your own identification purposes.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-
hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-
ferently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The Shift to Park warning appears on Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
When stopping the engine the display and the inside warning position.
position.
chime sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P The Push ignition to OFF warning ap- The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
(Park) position pears in the display. position. position.
The Door Open warning appears on
When opening the driver’s door to get The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
the display and the inside warning
out of the vehicle position. position.
chime sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
sounds three times and the inside
position. position.
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The Rear Door Alert warning message
When closing the door after getting
appears on the display, the horn Check the back seat for all articles,
out of the vehicle
sounds three times twice, or a “Check The Rear Door Alert is activated. press the ENTER button to clear the
Back Seat For All Articles” warning ap- Rear Door Alert warning message.
pears on the display.
The Shift to Park warning appears on The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
the display and the outside chime tion and the shift lever is not in the P sition and place the ignition switch in
sounds continuously. (Park) position. the OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

 Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
When closing the door with the inside
mately 3 seconds and all the doors The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
lock knob in the lock position
unlock.
When pushing the button on The outside chime sounds for approxi-
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
the Intelligent Key to lock the door mately 2 seconds.
Replace the battery with a new one.
The Key battery low warning appears For additional information, refer to
The battery charge is low.
on the display. “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
When pushing the ignition switch to
The No Key Detected warning appears
start the engine
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The I-Key System Error warning mes-
It warns of a malfunction with the In- It is recommended that you visit a
When pushing the ignition switch sage in the vehicle information display
telligent Key system. NISSAN dealer.
appears.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)

Laws in some local communities may re- REMOTE ENGINE START

strict the use of remote starters. For ex- OPERATING RANGE
ample, some laws require a person using
Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in WARNING
view. Check local regulations for any re-
quirements. To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
Other conditions may affect the function of vehicle and/or its systems, including
the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- entrapment in windows or inadvertent
tional information, refer to “Conditions the door lock activation, do not leave chil-
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this dren, people who require the assistance
section. of others or pets unattended in your ve-
hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-
Other conditions can affect the perfor- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can
mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. quickly become high enough to cause a
LPD2946
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN significant risk of injury or death to
The button will be on the NISSAN In-
Intelligent Key®” in this section. people and pets.
telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-
gine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle. CAUTION
The following feature may be affected When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
when Remote Engine Start is used: charged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate location, the Intelligent Key operating
control system will default to either a range becomes narrower, and the Intel-
heating or cooling mode depending on ligent Key may not function properly.
outside and cabin temperatures. For
additional information, refer to “Remote The Remote Engine Start function can only
Engine Start with Intelligent Climate be used when the Intelligent Key is within
Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, the specified operating range from the ve-
phone and voice recognition systems” hicle.
section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
The Remote Engine Start operating range ∙ The engine will continue to run for A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve- 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend or a single Remote Engine Start with an
hicle. the time for an additional 10 minutes. extension, are allowed between ignition
For additional information, refer to “Ex- cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE tending engine run time” in this section. to the ON position and then back to the
To use the Remote Engine Start feature Press and hold the brake pedal while OFF position before the Remote Engine
perform the following: switching the ignition to the ON position Start procedure can be used again.
before driving. For additional information, CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual. START
2. Press the button to lock all
doors. EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold The Remote Engine Start feature can be
the button until the turn signal extended one time by performing the ∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” and press until the parking lights
the vehicle is not within view press and in this section. Run time will be calculated turn off.
hold the button for at least 2 sec- as follows:
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
onds. ∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
The following events will occur when the when the Remote Engine Start function ∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then
engine starts: is performed. off.
∙ The parking lights will turn on and re- ∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme- ∙ The extended engine run time has ex-
main on as long as the engine is run- diately when the Remote Engine Start pired.
ning. function is performed again. For ex- ∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
ample, if the engine has been running
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are ∙ Opening the engine hood.
control system may come on. added, the engine will run for a total of
∙ Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).
15 minutes.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
∙ Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit. into the vehicle.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 ∙ Pushing the ignition switch without the ∙ The button is not pressed and The Remote Engine Start may display a
Intelligent Key in the vehicle. held within 5 seconds of pressing the warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-
lock button. tion display. For additional information, re-
∙ Not pressing the brake pedal while
fer to “Vehicle information display” in the
pressing the ignition switch with the In- ∙ The brake is pressed. “Instruments and controls” section of this
telligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked. manual.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
∙ The liftgate is open.
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if ∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid
any of the following conditions are present: is in the vehicle information display.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
position. into the vehicle.

∙ The hood is not securely closed. ∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on. have already been used.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine ∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from ∙ There is a detected registered key al-
running to off. This is not applicable ready inside of the vehicle.
when extending engine run time. ∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
∙ The button is not pressed and
Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa-
held for at least 2 seconds.
tion display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

HOOD LIFTGATE

WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Ex-
haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
LPD2620
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊1
WARNING entrapment in windows or inadver-
located below the driver side instru- tent door lock activation, do not leave
ment panel. The hood will spring up ∙ Make sure the hood is completely
children, people who require the as-
slightly. closed and latched before driving.
sistance of others or pets unattended
Failure to do so could cause the hood
2. Push the lever 䊊 2 at the front of the to fly open and result in an accident.
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
perature inside a closed vehicle on a
hood to the side as illustrated with your
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming warm day can quickly become high
fingertips
from the engine compartment, to enough to cause a significant risk of
3. Raise the hood 䊊
3 . avoid injury do not open the hood. injury or death to people and pets.
4. Remove the support rod and insert ∙ Always be sure that hands and feet
into the slot 䊊
4 . are clear of the door frame to avoid
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and injury while closing the liftgate.
make sure it locks into place.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 LPD2274 LPD2108 LPD2212
OPERATING THE MANUAL OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE Instrument panel switch
LIFTGATE (if so equipped) (if so equipped) NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power lift-
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors including the lift-
WARNING gate, the shift lever must be in P (Park).
Also, the power liftgate will not operate if
gate simultaneously. ∙ Make sure that all passengers have
battery voltage is low.
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate
fore closing the liftgate.
opener switch 䊊 A and pull up on the Power Open:
∙ Do not leave children unattended in- The power liftgate automatically moves
handle.
side the vehicle. They could unknow- from the fully closed position to the fully
To close, lower and push the liftgate down open position in approximately 5 – 8 sec-
ingly activate switches or controls.
securely. onds. The power open feature can be acti-
Unattended children could become
involved in serious accidents. vated by the switch on the key fob, the instru-
ment panel switch or the liftgate open
switch. A chime sounds to indicate the
power open sequence has been started.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
 A warning chime will sound if the shift lever
is moved out of P (Park) and the vehicle is
beginning to move, during a power open
operation.

LPD2109 LPD2615
Liftgate opener switch Power Close:
∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate The power liftgate automatically moves
can be opened by the instrument panel from the fully open position to the second-
switch, key fob or liftgate opener switch ary position. When the liftgate reaches the
䊊 A (with key fob in liftgate range). The secondary position, the cinching motor en-
liftgate will individually unlock and open. gages and pulls the liftgate to its primary
Once the liftgate is closed, the vehicle latch position. Power close takes approxi-
will remain in the unlock status. mately 7 – 10 seconds. The power close
∙ The key fob button must be held for feature can be activated by the switch on
1 second before the liftgate opens. the key fob, the instrument panel or the
liftgate switch 䊊B . A chime sounds to indi-
∙ The liftgate must be unlocked to open it cate the power close sequence has been
with the liftgate opener switch 䊊 A and started.
without key fob in liftgate range.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 ∙ If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
A is acti- NOTE:
vated while the cinching motor is en-
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
gaged, the cinching motor will disen- the power close function will not oper-
gage, and the liftgate will enter the ate.
power open function initiated by the lift-
gate opener switch. WARNING
∙ The key fob button must be held for There are some small distances imme-
1 second before the liftgate closes. diately before the closed position which
Stop - Reverse: cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
During an open/close movement, the lift-
side the vehicle before closing the
gate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key,
liftgate.
instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊 A or
䊊B ) is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed
LPD2274
if the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or
liftgate switch (䊊A or 䊊 B ) is pressed again. Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the lift-
Auto Reverse: gate may be operated manually. Power op-
If an obstacle is detected during power eration may not be available if multiple ob-
open or power close, a warning chime will stacles have been detected in a single
sound and the liftgate will reverse direction power cycle, or if battery voltage is low.
and return to the full open or full close po-
sition. If a second obstacle is detected, the If the power liftgate opener switch 䊊
A is
liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will pushed during power open or close, the
enter manual mode. power operation will be canceled and the
liftgate can be operated manually.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of
the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a To open the liftgate manually, press the lift-
gate opener switch 䊊 A and lift the liftgate.
pinch strip during power close, the liftgate
will reverse direction and return to the full To close, lower and push the liftgate down
open position. securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if
so equipped)
The liftgate can be operated using a quick
kicking motion under the center of the rear
bumper.
To operate, the Intelligent Key must be
within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate.

LPD2768 LPD2873
Activation zone DO: Quick forward kick and return while
Proper operation technique the key fob is within range
∙ Three beeps will sound and the liftgate
∙ While at the rear of the vehicle, begin will begin moving within two seconds
making a quick forward kicking motion. after the kick.
∙ Raise your foot straight under the cen-
ter of the rear bumper then immedi- CAUTION
ately return your foot to the ground in a Before performing the kicking motion,
continuous motion. steady your stance to prevent any loss
of balance. Also, while making the kick-
∙ The kicking motion should be straight, ing motion, take caution around hot ex-
smooth and consistent. haust system parts. Otherwise, there
∙ After your kick motion is complete, step may be danger of injury.
back and allow the liftgate to
open/close.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 CAUTION CAUTION
∙ Interference or malfunction can be ∙ If the power liftgate does not stay
caused by parking in close proximity open or if the liftgate unexpectedly
to radio or satellite towers. closes at any time while a continuous
warning chime sounds, do not oper-
∙ Intelligent Key interference could be
ate the liftgate. There may be a pres-
caused if you have your key fob stored
sure loss in one or both of the liftgate
next to your cell phone or any RF-
struts. It is recommended that you
enabled smart card. For additional in-
have the liftgate inspected. It is rec-
formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
Key®” in this section.
dealer for this service.
LIFTGATE RELEASE ∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if
one or both of the liftgate struts are
LPD2764 WARNING removed. Damage to the liftgate or
DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause power liftgate mechanisms may
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
during kick occur.
closed securely to prevent it from
WARNING opening while driving.
Prevent unintentional liftgate ∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.
opening/closing. There may be condi- This could allow dangerous exhaust
tions when opening/closing the liftgate gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key additional information, refer to “Ex-
out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
80 cm), when washing or working “Starting and driving” section of this
around the back of the vehicle. manual.
∙ To avoid personal injury, do not at-
tempt to activate the power liftgate if
one or both of the liftgate struts are
removed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

 LPD2646 SPA2778 LPD2615
Manual liftgate release (if so Power liftgate release (if so LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so
equipped) equipped) equipped)
If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked If the liftgate cannot be opened with the The liftgate can be set to open to a specific
with the door lock switch or the Intelligent instrument panel switch, liftgate opener height by performing the following:
Key due to a discharged battery, follow switch or key fob due to a discharged bat-
1. Open the liftgate using the request
these steps: tery, follow these steps:
switch or the Intelligent Key.
1. Remove the cover 䊊
A on the inside of 1. Remove the cover 䊊
A on the inside of
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired
the liftgate. the liftgate.
position and hold the liftgate (the lift-
2. Move the lever 䊊
B as illustrated to open 2. Move the lever 䊊
B as illustrated to open gate will have some resistance when
the liftgate. the liftgate. being manually adjusted).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for repair. dealer as soon as possible for repair.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3. While holding the liftgate in position, 2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the
push and hold the liftgate switch right side of the fuel-filler door to re-
located on the liftgate for approxi- lease.
mately 5 seconds or until two beeps
To lock (if so equipped), close the fuel-filler
are heard.
door securely and lock the doors.
The liftgate will open to the selected posi-
tion setting. To change the position of the FUEL-FILLER CAP
liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the po-
sition of the liftgate. WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seri-
ously injured if it is misused or mis-
LPD2110 handled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR sparks near the vehicle when
The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks (if refueling.
so equipped) when the driver’s door is un- ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
locked. after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
the following operations:
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Unlock the driver’s door with the In-
telligent Key.
∙ Push the power door lock switch to
the unlock position.
∙ Push the door handle request switch
(with the Intelligent Key in range).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

∙ Use only an original equipment type CAUTION ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has properly may cause the Mal-
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
a built-in safety valve needed for function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
proper operation of the fuel system nate. If the light illuminates be-
additional information, refer to “Fuel
and emission control system. An in- cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
recommendation” in the “Technical
correct cap can result in a serious mal- missing, tighten or install the cap and
and consumer information” section of
function and possible injury. It could continue to drive the vehicle.
this manual.
also cause the Malfunction Indi- The light should turn off after a
cator Light (MIL) to come on. ∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message
will be displayed/warning will appear few driving trips. If the light does
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body if the fuel-filler cap is not properly not turn off after a few driving trips,
to attempt to start your vehicle. tightened. It may take a few driving have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
trips for the message to be displayed. ommended that you visit a NISSAN
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap dealer for this service.
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable properly after the Loose Fuel Cap ∙ For additional information, refer to
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or warning message is “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious displayed/warning appears may the “Instruments and controls” sec-
injury or death when filling portable cause the Malfunction Indicator tion of this manual.
fuel containers: Light (MIL) to illuminate.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
– Always place the container on the flush it away with water to avoid paint
ground when filling. damage.
– Do not use electronic devices when
NOTE:
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact Changing ignition switch status during
with the container while you are the refueling process may cause a delay
filling it. in fuel gauge response.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Press the button 䊊 A on the steer-
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off
the Loose Fuel Cap warning 䊊 B after
tightening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2621 LPD2066
To remove the fuel-filler cap: Loose Fuel Cap warning
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
wise to remove. vehicle information display when the fuel-
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder filler cap is not tightened correctly after the
䊊1 while refueling. vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be dis-
To install the fuel-filler cap: played. To turn off the warning, perform the
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the following:
fuel-filler tube. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a soon as possible. For additional infor-
single click is heard. mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this
section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and com-
fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you LPD2111 LPD2410
are up against it when it inflates. Al- MANUAL OPERATION (if so AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so
ways sit back against the seatback equipped)
and as far away as practical from the
equipped)
steering wheel. Always use the seat Tilt and telescopic operation Tilt and telescopic operation
belts. Pull the lock lever 䊊
1 down:
To adjust the steering wheel move the
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in switch 䊊
1 in the following directions:
direction 䊊
2 to the desired position.
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or direction 䊊
2 to the desired tilt position.
backward in direction 䊊
3 to the desired
position. ∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction 䊊
3 to the desired
Push the lock lever 䊊 up firmly to lock the
1
telescopic position.
steering wheel in place.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

 SUN VISORS

CAUTION Entry/Exit function (if so

equipped)
For vehicles with automatic drive posi-
tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele- The automatic drive positioner system (if
scoping functions of the steering so equipped) will make the steering wheel
wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has move up automatically when the driver’s
been discharged, may prevent the door is opened and the ignition switch is in
steering wheel position from being the LOCK position. This lets the driver get
adjusted. into and out of the seat more easily. The
steering wheel moves back into position
For vehicles with automatic drive posi- when the driver’s door is closed and the
tioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering ignition switch is pushed.
operation must be reset after the vehicle’s
battery has been discharged in order to For additional information, refer to “Auto-
prevent the tilt and telescopic operation matic drive positioner” in this section.
from locking in one position. When the bat-
tery has been recharged or replaced, per-
form the following:
∙ For tilt operation, adjust the switch 䊊
1
so the steering wheel moves to the
highest position 䊊 2 that can be
reached.
∙ For telescopic operation, adjust the LPD2154
switch 䊊1 so the steering wheel moves Type A (if so equipped)
to the most forward and backward po- 1. To block glare from the front, swing
sition 䊊
3 that can be reached. down the main sun visor 䊊1 .

Performing these operations resets the

range of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-
scopic function.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

2. To block glare from the side, remove 1. To block glare from the front, swing
the main sun visor from the center down the main sun visor 䊊
1 .
mount and swing the visor to the side
䊊2 . 2. To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out mount and swing the visor to the side
as needed 䊊3 . 䊊2 .

3. Slide the extension sun visor 䊊

3 in or
CAUTION out as needed.
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original CAUTION
position.
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor turning the extension to its original
forcedly downward. position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

WPD0297
Type B (if so equipped)
3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 MIRRORS

LPD2067 LPD2644 WPD0126

VANITY MIRRORS Driver’s side MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
CARD HOLDER MIRROR (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover. To access the card holder located on the Use the night position 䊊1 to reduce glare
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated (if so ceiling, pull the driver’s side sun visor down from the headlights of vehicles behind you
equipped) and turn on when the mirror and slide the card into the card holder 䊊 1 . at night.
cover is open. Do not view information while operating
the vehicle. Use the day position 䊊
2 when driving in
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-45

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it au-
tomatically dims during night time condi-
tions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
The indicator light 䊊
2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-
ing.

NOTE: LPD0469 LPD2660

Type A - Without compass Type B - With compass (if so equipped)
Do not hang any objects over the sen- (if so equipped) To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature
sors 䊊1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity Type A and Type B (if so equipped) again, press:
of the sensors, resulting in improper op- The indicator light 䊊
2 will illuminate when ∙ The | button for inside mirrors with-
eration. the automatic anti-glare feature is operat- out compass.
ing.
∙ The button for inside mirrors with
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, compass.
press: The indicator light will turn on.
∙ The O button for inside mirrors with- For additional information on HomeLink®
out compass. Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) op-
eration, refer to “HomeLink® Universal
∙ The button for inside mirrors with
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and con-
compass.
trols” section of this manual.
The indicator light will turn off.
3-46 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
For additional information on the compass WARNING
display 䊊 3 (if so equipped), refer to “Com-
pass display” in the “Instruments and con- ∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
trols” section of this manual. on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your shoul-
der to properly judge distances to
other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.

LPD2452
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to select the left
or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch 䊊 2 .
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to the center
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-47

 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so
equipped)

The outside mirror surfaces will return to The automatic drive positioner system has
their original position when one of the fol- two features:
lowing conditions has occurred:
∙ Memory storage function
∙ The shift lever is moved to any position
∙ Entry/exit function
other than R (Reverse).
∙ The outside mirror control switch is set
to the neutral or center position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in
LPD2112 the center position, the mirror surface
will NOT turn downward when the shift
Manual folding outside mirrors lever is moved to R (Reverse).
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to For additional information, refer to “Auto-
fold it. matic drive positioner” in this section.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-
outside mirror surfaces downward to pro- ibility. For additional information, refer to
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle “Rear window and outside mirror (if so
when the mirror control switch is in either equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-
the L or R position. ments and controls” section of this manual.
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R
(Reverse).
3-48 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
 2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col- ∙ If a memory position has been stored in
umn and outside mirrors to the desired the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light
positions by manually operating each for the respective switch will stay on for
adjusting switch. For additional infor- approximately 5 seconds.
mation, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—
Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- Linking a key fob to a stored
straint system” section of this manual, memory position
and “Steering wheel” and “Outside mir- Each key fob can be linked to a stored
rors” in this section. memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)
with the following procedure.
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-
onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2). 1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage
function” section for storing the
4. The indicator light for the pushed
memory position.
memory switch will come on and stay
LPD2508
on for approximately 5 seconds. 2. The indicator light for the pushed
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION memory switch will come on. While the
5. The chime will sound when the
indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering memory is stored.
column and outside mirrors can be stored the button on the key fob. The
in the automatic drive positioner memory. NOTE: hazard lights will flash twice. The indi-
Follow these procedures to set the cator light of the linked memory switch
If a new memory position is stored in the will blink and click twice. After the indi-
memory system.
same memory switch, the previous cator light goes off, the key fob is linked
memory position will be overwritten by to that memory setting.
NOTE:
the new stored position. Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is
The vehicle should be stopped while set-
ting the memory. Confirming memory storage in the OFF position, pressing the but-
ton on the key fob will move the driver’s
1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC po- ∙ Push the SET switch. seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to
sition. the linked memory switch position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-49

NOTE: ∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from on to off. To use the memory function, set the cli-
mate, navigation and audio systems to the
If a new memory position is stored in the ∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from on to
linked memory switch, then the key fob driver’s preferred settings. Lock the doors
off.
will link the new position and overwrites with the Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key
the previous position. Restarting the entry/exit function may be set with the driver’s individual pref-
erences. When a new Intelligent Key is used,
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the “Connection with the key has been done”
This system is designed so that the driver’s fuse opens, the stored memory positions will be displayed on the screen and the
seat and steering column will automati- will be lost and some of the functions will memorized settings are available.
cally move when the shift lever is in the P be restricted:
(Park) position. This allows the driver to To engage the memorized settings, per-
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h). form the following:
easily get in and out of the driver’s seat.
OR 1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering column will move up: 2. Open and close the driver’s door more the memorized settings.
than two times with the ignition switch 2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driv-
∙ When the driver’s door is opened with
the ignition switch in the OFF position. in the OFF position. er’s door handle request switch or
The entry/exit function should now work the button on the Intelligent Key.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed
from ACC to OFF with the driver’s door properly. 3. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” po-
open. sition. The settings linked to the Intelli-
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION gent Key will start.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
The position of the following settings can For additional information, refer to “Heater
return to the previous position:
be linked to the Intelligent Key and the and air conditioner (automatic)” in the
∙ When the ignition switch is changed memorized settings can be available for “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
from ACC or ON while the shift lever is in each Intelligent Key. recognition systems” section of this
the P (Park) position. manual.
∙ Climate control system
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or For additional information on using the
canceled through “Vehicle Settings” in the ∙ Navigation system (if so equipped) navigation system (if so equipped), refer to
vehicle information display by performing ∙ Audio system the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
the following: Manual.
3-50 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(7 km/h).
∙ When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive posi-
tioner is operating.
∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat
and steering column is pushed while
the automatic drive positioner is oper-
ating.
∙ When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
∙ When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
∙ When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-51

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Intelligent Around View Monitor system

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor)
Difference between predicted and (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Sonar system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
How to park with predicted course Turning on and off the sonar function . . . . . . . 4-25
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Sonar system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
How to turn on and off predicted Moving Object Detection (MOD)
course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-9 MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Turning MOD on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Intelligent Around View Monitor
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Difference between predicted and Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . 4-32
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to park with predicted course Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Rear automatic air conditioning system . . . . . 4-37
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
USB/iPod® charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual that includes the following infor-
mation.
∙ NissanConnect® Services (if so
equipped)
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice recognition (if so equipped)
∙ General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA4815

WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience The RearView Monitor system automati-
feature and is not a substitute for cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
proper backing. Always turn and look the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
out the windows and check mirrors to position. When activating the RearView
be sure that it is safe to move before Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the
operating the vehicle. Always back up messages may not be displayed immedi-
slowly. ately. The radio can still be heard while the
RearView Monitor is active.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the ve-
hicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a LHA3757
level paved surface. The distance To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
viewed on the monitor is for reference tor system uses a camera located just
only and may be different than the above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊 1 .
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
CAUTION With the ignition switch in the ON position,
Do not scratch the camera lens when move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
the camera. When activating the RearView Monitor, the
guide lines, the icons and the messages
may not be displayed immediately.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
4 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
Indicate the vehicle width when backing AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
up. The displayed guidelines and their loca-
Predicted course lines 䊊
5 tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
Indicate the predicted course when back- surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ing up. The predicted course lines will be ally located at distances different from
displayed on the monitor when the shift those displayed in the monitor relative to
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
steering wheel is turned. When activating in doubt, turn around and view the objects
the RearView Monitor, the guide lines, the as you are backing up, or park and exit the
icons and the messages may not be dis- vehicle to view the positioning of objects
played immediately. The predicted course behind the vehicle.
lines will move depending on how much
LHA4805 the steering wheel is turned and will not be
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED displayed while the steering wheel is in the
LINES straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
of the predicted course lines are wider than
width and distances to objects with refer-
the actual width and course.
ence to the vehicle body line 䊊A are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
∙ Red line 䊊
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

 LHA5002 LHA5003 LHA4995
Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
object
distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width The predicted course lines 䊊 A do not touch
guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual the object in the display. However, the ve-
distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is hicle may hit the object if it projects over
further than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. the actual backing up course.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
 object when backing up to the position 䊊 A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
LHA5004 to lock while the engine is running. LHA5043
Backing up behind a projecting – Drive the vehicle on a straight road 1. Visually check that the parking space is
object for more than 5 minutes. safe before parking your vehicle.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
position 䊊B in the display. However, the po-
with the ignition switch in the ACC po- on the screen 䊊A when the shift lever is
sition, the predicted course lines may
sition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
be displayed incorrectly.
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
the position 䊊 A . The vehicle may hit the When activating the RearView Monitor,
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
 the guide lines, the icons and the mes- 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
sages may not be displayed immedi- the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
D parallel
ately. to the parking space 䊊C while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.

LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the pre-
dicted course lines 䊊
B enter the park-
ing space 䊊C .

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF ∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-
PREDICTED COURSE LINES ner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
To toggle on and off the predicted course cause of its monitoring range limita-
lines while in the P (Park) position: tion. The system will not show small
1. Press the SETTING button. objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
2. Touch the “Camera” or “Camera/Sonar” or on the ground.
key.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
3. Touch the “Camera” key. tor differ from actual distance be-
cause a wide-angle lens is used.
4. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key
to turn the feature on or off. ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
LHA4243 REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM when viewed in the rearview and out-
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN LIMITATIONS side mirrors.

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, ∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
WARNING The lines are highly affected by the
Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and Color of the
RearView Monitor, press the SETTING but- Listed below are the system limitations number of occupants, fuel level, ve-
ton with the RearView Monitor on. Select for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate hicle position, road conditions and
one of the items and change the value by the vehicle in accordance with these road grade.
touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the system limitations could result in seri- ∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely
multi-function controller. ous injury or death. closed when backing up.
∙ The system cannot completely elimi- ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
NOTE: nate blind spots and may not show camera. The rearview camera is in-
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, every object. stalled above the license plate.
Black Level, Tint, and Color of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make
sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

∙ When washing the vehicle with high ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
pressure water, be sure not to spray it clear in a dark environment.
around the camera. Otherwise, water ∙ There may be a delay when switching
may enter the camera unit causing between views.
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- display objects clearly. Clean the cam-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may era.
malfunction or cause damage result-
ing in a fire or an electric shock. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
The following are operating limitations and dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
do not represent a system malfunction: agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
∙ When the temperature is extremely LHA3757
high or low, the screen may not clearly SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the CAUTION
camera, objects may not be displayed ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
clearly. to clean the camera. This will cause
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on discoloration.
the screen. This is due to strong re- ∙ Do not damage the camera as the
flected light from the bumper. monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
cent light. camera 䊊 1 , the RearView Monitor may not
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView display objects clearly. Clean the camera
Monitor may differ somewhat from the by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
actual color of objects.
ing it with a dry cloth.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA4816
1. CAMERA button or CAMERA but-
ton

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

 WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem is designed as an aid to the driver in
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel
structions for the proper use of the parking.
Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem could result in serious injury or The monitor displays various views of the
death. position of the vehicle in a split screen for-
mat. Not all views are available at all times.
∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is
a convenience feature and is not a Available views:
substitute for proper vehicle opera- ∙ Front View
tion because it has areas where ob- An approximately 150–degree view of
jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- the front of the vehicle.
ners of the vehicle in particular, are
areas where objects do not always ∙ Rear View
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear An approximately 150–degree view of LHA3759
views. Always check your surround- the rear of the vehicle. To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
ings to be sure that it is safe to move ∙ Bird’s-Eye View Around View Monitor system uses cam-
before operating the vehicle. Always The surrounding views of the vehicle eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-
operate the vehicle slowly. from above. cle’s outside mirrors and one just above
∙ The driver is always responsible for the vehicle’s license plate 䊊
1 .
∙ Front-Side View
safety during parking and other The view around and ahead of the front INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
maneuvers. passenger’s side wheel. MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
CAUTION With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
Do not scratch the camera lens when sition or press the CAMERA or
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of CAMERA button to operate the Intelli-
the camera. gent Around View Monitor. When activating
the Intelligent Around View Monitor, the
icons and the messages may not be dis-
played immediately.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When the camera is first activated with the
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s- ∙ The vehicle width and predicted
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so eye view as a reference. The lines and course lines are wider than the actual
equipped) will flash on the screen. This in- the bird’s-eye view are greatly af- width and course.
dicates that the sonar system is activated. fected by the number of occupants,
For additional information on the rear so- ∙ The displayed lines will appear
cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road
nar system, refer to “Rear Sonar System slightly off to the right, because the
condition and road grade.
(RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of rearview camera is not installed in the
this manual. ∙ If the tires are replaced with different rear center of the vehicle.
sized tires, the predicted course lines
The screen displayed on the Intelligent and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-
Around View Monitor will automatically re- played incorrectly.
turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after
the CAMERA or CAMERA button has ∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
jects viewed in the monitor are fur-
been pressed with the shift lever in a posi-
ther than they appear. When driving
tion other than the R (Reverse) position.
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
Available views in the monitor are closer than they
appear.
WARNING ∙ Objects in the rear view will appear
∙ The distance guide lines and the ve- visually opposite compared to when
hicle width lines should be used as a viewed in the monitor and outside
reference only when the vehicle is on a mirrors.
paved, level surface. The apparent ∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to
distance viewed on the monitor may properly judge distances to other
be different than the actual distance objects.
between the vehicle and displayed
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
objects.
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the ac-
tual course line.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

 The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straight-
ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines 䊊6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.

SAA1840 LHA4992
Front view Rear view
Front and rear view Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5 :
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate Indicate the approximate vehicle width
vehicle width and distance to objects with when backing up.
reference to the vehicle body line 䊊 A are
displayed on the monitor. Predicted course lines 䊊
6 :

Distance guide lines Indicate the predicted course when oper-

ating the vehicle. The predicted course
Indicate distances from the vehicle body: lines will be displayed on the monitor when
∙ Red line 䊊1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
∙ Yellow line 䊊2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) course lines will move depending on how
∙ Green line 䊊 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) much the steering wheel is turned and
might not be displayed while the steering
∙ Green line 䊊4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
(if so equipped)
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
 move depending on how much the steer-
ing wheel is turned and will not be dis-
played while the steering wheel is in the
neutral position.
When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-
grees or less from the neutral position, the
two green predicted course lines are
shown in front of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, one green predicted
course line is shown in front of the vehicle
LHA4534 LHA4535
and the other predicted course line is
shown at the side of the vehicle.
Front view Rear view
Bird’s-eye view The non-viewable area 䊊 2 is highlighted in When the monitor displays the rear view,
yellow for several seconds after the bird’s- the predicted course lines are shown at the
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead eye view is displayed. It will be shown only back of the vehicle.
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the the first time after the ignition switch is
vehicle position and the predicted course placed in the ON position. WARNING
to a parking space.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are ∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-
The vehicle icon 䊊1 shows the position of displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec- pear further than the actual distance.
the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- onds 䊊 3 to remind the driver to be cau-
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
tance between objects viewed in the bird’s- tious.
may be misaligned or not displayed at
eye view may differ somewhat from the
Predicted course lines 䊊4 indicate the pre- the seam of the views.
actual distance to the vehicle.
dicted course when operating the vehicle. ∙ Objects that are above the camera
The areas that the cameras cannot cover The predicted course lines will be displayed cannot be displayed.
䊊2 are indicated in black. on the monitor when the steering wheel is
turned. The predicted course lines will
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
misaligned when the camera position AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
alters.
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
∙ A line on the ground may be mis- tions on the ground are for approximate
aligned and is not seen as being reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
straight at the seam of the views. The surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
misalignment will increase as the line ally located at distances different from
proceeds away from the vehicle. those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line 䊊
2 shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the out-
side mirrors.
The extensions 䊊 3 of both the front 䊊
1 and
side 䊊2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
 LHA5002 LHA5003 LHA4995
Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
object
distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width The predicted course lines 䊊 A do not touch
guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual the object in the display. However, the ve-
distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is hicle may hit the object if it projects over
further than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. the actual backing up course.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
 object when backing up to the position 䊊 A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
LHA5004 to lock while the engine is running. LHA5043
Backing up behind a projecting – Drive the vehicle on a straight road 1. Visually check that the parking space is
object for more than 5 minutes. safe before parking your vehicle.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the
with the ignition switch in the ACC po-
position 䊊B in the display. However, the po-
sition, the predicted course lines may
sition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
be displayed incorrectly.
the position 䊊 A . The vehicle may hit the

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
on the screen 䊊 A when the shift lever is the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
D parallel
moved to the R (Reverse) position. to the parking space 䊊C while referring
When activating the RearView Monitor, to the predicted course lines.
the guide lines, the icons and the mes-
sages may not be displayed immedi- 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
ately. completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA or CAMERA button
or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position to operate the Intelligent Around
View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-
plays different split screen views depend-
ing on the position of the shift lever. When
activating the Intelligent Around View
Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the
messages may not be displayed immedi-
LHA4770 ately. Press the CAMERA or CAMERA
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting button to switch between the available
the steering wheel so that the pre- views.
dicted course lines 䊊
B enter the park- If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
ing space 䊊C . the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (drive) NOTE:
position, the available views are:
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast,
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen Black Level, Tint, and Color of the Intelli-
gent Around View Monitor while the ve-
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
The display will switch from the Intelligent brake is firmly applied.
Around View Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
∙ A different screen is selected.

LHA4212
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and Color of the
Intelligent Around View Monitor, press the
SETTING button with the monitor on. Select
one of the items and change the value by
touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the
multi-function controller.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 WARNING ∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
Listed below are the system limitations
cause a malfunction or cause damage
for Intelligent Around View Monitor.
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-
dance with these system limitations There are some areas where the system
could result in serious injury or death. will not show objects and the system does
∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View not warn of moving objects. When in the
Monitor with the outside mirrors in front or rear view display, an object below
the stored position, and make sure the bumper or on the ground may not be
that the liftgate is securely closed viewed 䊊 1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
when operating the vehicle using the object near the seam 䊊 2 of the camera
Intelligent Around View Monitor. viewing areas will not appear in the moni-
∙ The apparent distance between ob- tor.
jects viewed on the Intelligent Around The following are operating limitations and
View Monitor differs from the actual do not represent a system malfunction:
distance.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
∙ The cameras are installed on the front between views.
grille, the outside mirrors and above
the rear license plate. Do not put any- ∙ When the temperature is extremely
thing on the vehicle that covers the high or low, the screen may not display
cameras. objects clearly.
LHA3760
∙ When washing the vehicle with high ∙ When strong light directly shines on the
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW pressure water, be sure not to spray it camera, objects may not be displayed
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- clearly.
ter may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
malfunction, fire or an electric shock. cent light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

 ∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor may differ some-
what from the actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not be clear and the color
of the object may differ in a dark envi-
ronment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
has been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry LHA3591 LHA3592
cloth. System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, ing temporary electronic disturbances
there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- from surrounding devices. This will not hin-
ligent Around View Monitor. This will not der normal driving operation but the sys-
hinder normal driving operation but the tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-
system should be inspected. It is recom- quently. It is recommended that you visit a
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service.
this service.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking
sensor) (if so equipped)

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of WARNING

the cameras 䊊 1 , the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not display objects clearly. Failure to follow the warnings and in-
Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth structions for proper use of the sonar
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning function as outlined in this section
agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The sonar is a convenience feature. It
is not a substitute for proper parking.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large station-
ary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
LHA3759 safety during parking and other
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE maneuvers.
∙ Always look around and check that it
CAUTION is safe to move before parking.
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner ∙ Read and understand the limitations
to clean the camera. This will cause of the sonar as contained in this
discoloration. section.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the The sonar function helps to inform the
monitor screen may be adversely driver of large stationary objects around
affected. the vehicle when parking by issuing an au-
dible and visual alert.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

 When the camera image is shown on the
center display, the system shows the sonar
indicator regardless of the shift lever posi-
tion.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
The colors of the sonar indicators and the
distance guide lines in the front and rear
views indicate different distances to the
object.
When the objects are detected, the indica-
tor (green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking and the rate of the tone increase.
When the vehicle is very close to the object,
the indicator stops blinking and turns red,
and the tone sounds continuously.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-
LHA4817 onds when an object is detected by only
the corner sonar and the distance does
1. Center display SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION not change.
2. CAMERA or CAMERA button The system gives the tone for rear objects
when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) The tone will stop when the object is no
3. SETTING button position. longer near the vehicle.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 ∙ When the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position and turned back to the
“ON” position again. To prevent the so-
nar system from activating altogether,
use the “Camera” menu. For additional
information, refer to “Sonar function
settings” in this section.
Sonar function settings
To set up the sonar function to your pre-
ferred settings, press the SETTING button,
select the “Camera/Sonar” key and then
select the “Sonar” key on the center display.
Designs and items displayed on the
LHA4246 LHA4247
screen may vary depending on the mod-
TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR In the below cases, the sonar will be turned els.
FUNCTION back on automatically:
Sonar: When this item is turned on, the rear
When the “Sonar” key is selected, the indi- ∙ When the shift lever is placed in the “R” sonar is activated. When this item is turned
cator will turn off and the sonar will be (Reverse) position. off (indicator turns off), the rear sonar is
turned off temporarily. The Moving Object deactivated. The amber markers are dis-
∙ When the CAMERA or CAMERA played at the corners of the vehicle icon.
Detection (MOD) system will also be turned
button is pressed and a screen other The next time the ignition switch is placed
off at the same time. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Moving Object Detection than the camera view is shown on the in the ON position, “sonar is OFF” is dis-
(MOD) in this section. When the “Sonar” key display. played briefly.
is selected again, the indicator will turn on ∙ When vehicle speed decreases below Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity
and the sonar will turn back on. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). level of the sonar higher (right) or lower
(left).
Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the
buzzer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Towing mode (if so equipped): When this
∙ The system will not detect small ob- System temporarily unavailable
item is turned on, only the rear sonar is off. jects below the bumper, and may not
The amber markers are displayed at the When the amber markers are displayed at
detect objects close to the bumper or the corners of the vehicle icon and the
rear corners of the vehicle icon. on the ground. function cannot be activated from the
Show Camera when Sonar Activate (if so
∙ The system may not detect the fol- Camera setting menu (the setting items
equipped): When this item is turned on, the
lowing objects: are grayed out), the sonar system may be
camera view is automatically shown on the malfunctioning.
display in the case that the distance to the – Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,
objects measured by the sonar is becom- cotton, grass or wool. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
ing short. – Thin objects such as rope, wire or
chain. CAUTION
SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
– Wedge-shaped objects. Keep the surface of the sonar sensors
WARNING (located on the front and rear bumper
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the fascia) free from accumulations of
Listed below are the system limitations bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the
for the sonar function. Failure to oper- or bent, the sensing zone may be al- surface of the sonar sensors when
ate the vehicle in accordance with these tered causing inaccurate measure- cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the
system limitations could result in seri- ment of objects or false alarms. accuracy of the sonar function will be
ous injury or death. diminished.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic CAUTION
sources such as an automatic car Excessive noise (such as audio system
wash, a truck’s compressed-air volume or an open vehicle window) will
brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect interfere with the tone and it may not
the function of the system, including be heard.
reduced performance or a false
activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)

LHA4816
1. CAMERA or CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

 WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- The MOD system will turn on automatically
structions for proper use of the Mov- under the following conditions:
ing Object Detection system could re- ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
sult in serious injury or death. position.
∙ The MOD system is not a substitute
∙ When the CAMERA or CAMERA
for proper vehicle operation and is not
button is pressed to activate the cam-
designed to prevent contact with ob-
era view on the display.
jects surrounding the vehicle. When
maneuvering, always use the outside ∙ When vehicle speed decreases below
mirrors and rearview mirror and turn approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the
and check the surroundings to ensure camera screen is displayed.
it is safe to maneuver.
LHA4190
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds Front and bird’s-eye views
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is dis-
∙ The MOD system is not designed to played:
detect surrounding stationary
objects. ∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
The MOD system can inform the driver of stopped, the MOD system detects mov-
moving objects near the vehicle when ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
backing out of garages, maneuvering in MOD system will not operate if the out-
parking lots and in other such instances. side mirrors are moving in or out, in the
The MOD system detects moving objects stowed position, or if either front door is
by using image processing technology on opened.
the image shown in the display.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 When the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects
are detected. While the MOD system con-
tinues to detect moving objects, the yellow
frame continues to be displayed.

NOTE:
While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is
beeping, the MOD system does not
chime.
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
1 is
displayed on each camera image (front,
LHA5171 LHA4997 rear, right, left) depending on where mov-
Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views ing objects are detected.
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) The yellow frame 䊊 2 is displayed on each
position and the vehicle speed is below position and the vehicle speed is below view in the front view and rear view modes.
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the
A blue MOD icon 䊊 3 is displayed in the view
MOD system detects moving objects in MOD system detects moving objects in where the MOD system is operative. A gray
the front view. the rear view. When activating the Intel- MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
ligent Around View Monitor, the guide- MOD system is not operative.
lines, the icons and the messages may
not be displayed immediately. The MOD If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
system will not operate if the liftgate is icon 䊊3 is not displayed.
open.
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when in
this view.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF – When there is low contrast be- ∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
1. From the main menu, press the SET- tween background and the moving parts where the camera is installed,
TING button on the control panel objects. leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered and the
2. Touch the “Camera/Sonar” key – When there is a blinking source of
MOD system may not detect objects
light.
3. Select the “Camera” key properly.
– When strong light such as another
4. Touch “Moving Object Detection” to ∙ When the temperature is extremely
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
switch between ON and OFF. high or low, the screen may not dis-
present.
play objects clearly. This is not a
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – When camera orientation is not in malfunction.
its usual position, such as when a
WARNING mirror is folded. NOTE:
Listed below are the system limitations – When there is dirt, water drops or The blue MOD icon will change to orange
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle snow on the camera lens. if one of the following has occurred:
in accordance with these system limita- – When the position of the moving ∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
tions could result in serious injury or objects in the display is not
death. changed. ∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ Do not use the MOD system when ∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
towing a trailer. The system may not water droplets on the camera lens, ∙ When the RearView camera has de-
function properly. white smoke from the muffler, mov- tected a blockage (icon will blink).
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio ing shadows, etc. If the icon light continues to illuminate
system volume or open vehicle win- ∙ The MOD system may not function orange, have the MOD system checked. It
dow) will interfere with the chime properly depending on the speed, di- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
sound, and it may not be heard. rection, distance or shape of the mov- dealer for this service.
∙ The MOD system performance will be ing objects.
limited according to environmental
conditions and surrounding objects
such as:

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 VENTS

LHA3759
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely LHA4178
affected. Adjust air flow direction for the center vents Open or close the vents using the dial.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the 䊊1 , driver’s and passenger’s side vents 䊊 2 , Move the dial toward the to open the
cameras 䊊 1 , the MOD system may not oper- rear center console vents 䊊 3 , and rear pas- vents or toward the to close them.
ate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with senger compartment vents 䊊 4 by moving
a cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean- the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.
ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)

WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
LHA4776 enough to cause severe or possibly
1. Air recirculation button 7. ON-OFF button/ fan speed fatal injuries to people or animals.
2. MODE (manual air flow control) control dial ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
button 8. Front defroster button long periods as it may cause the inte-
3. Rear CTRL (rear climate display 9. AUTO (automatic) climate control rior air to become stale and the win-
screen) button button/ temperature control dial dows to fog up.
4. REAR ON-OFF button (driver’s side)
5. SYNC button/ temperature control Start the engine and operate the controls
dial (passenger’s side) to activate the air conditioner.
6. REAR window and outside NOTE:
mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch ∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 ∙ When parking, set the heater and air ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
conditioner controls to turn off air re- the vents in hot, humid conditions as the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
circulation to allow fresh air into the the air is cooled rapidly. This does not the system may not work properly.
passenger compartment. This should indicate a malfunction.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.
help reduce odors inside the vehicle. 3. You can individually set driver’s and
front passenger’s side temperature us- Dehumidified defrosting or
AUTOMATIC OPERATION defogging
ing each temperature control dial.
Cooling and/or dehumidified ∙ To synchronizes the driver’s and front 1. Press the front defroster button
heating (AUTO) passenger’s temperature settings, on. (The indicator light on the button
press the SYNC button. The SYNC indi- will come on.)
This mode may be used all year round as
cator will illuminate and SYNC text will
the system automatically works to keep a appear in the Climate display. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
constant temperature. Air flow distribution, the desired temperature.
air intake control, and fan speed are also Heating (A/C off) ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
controlled automatically.
The air conditioner does not activate. When of the windows, use the fan speed
1. Press the AUTO button on. you need to heat only, use this mode. control dial to set the fan speed to
maximum.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to Turn the temperature control dial to set the
the left or right to set the desired tem- desired temperature. ∙ As soon as possible after the wind-
perature. shield is clean, press the AUTO button to
1. If the air conditioner is on, touch the
return to the automatic mode.
∙ Adjust the temperature display to “A/C” key on the screen. The A/C indica-
about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation. tor light will turn off. ∙ When the front defroster button is
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set pressed, the air conditioner will auto-
∙ The temperature of the passenger matically be turned on at outside tem-
compartment will be maintained auto- the desired temperature.
peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir-
matically. Air flow distribution, air intake ∙ The temperature of the passenger culate mode automatically turns off,
control and fan speed are also con- compartment will be maintained auto- allowing outside air to be drawn into the
trolled automatically. matically. Air flow distribution, air intake passenger compartment to further im-
control and fan speed are also con- prove the defogging performance.
trolled automatically.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Remote Engine Start with MANUAL OPERATION When the outside temperature exceeds
Intelligent Climate Control (if so Fan speed control dial 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may
equipped) default to air recirculation mode automati-
Turn the fan speed control dial to cally to reduce overall power consumption.
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate manually control the fan speed. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the
controls and Remote Engine Start function
Press the AUTO button to return to auto- air recirculation button (indicator will turn
may go into automatic heating or cooling
matic control of the fan speed. off) to enter fresh air mode.
mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-
vated depending on outside and cabin Temperature control dial Automatic intake air control
temperatures. During this period, the cli-
The temperature control dial allows you to In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
mate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To controlled automatically. To manually con-
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- lower the temperature, turn the dial to the trol the intake air, press the air recir-
ing mode, the rear window defroster and left. To increase the temperature, turn the culation button. To return to the automatic
heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may dial to the right. Temperature can be ad- control mode, press and hold the air
be activated automatically. justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side. recirculation button for about 2 seconds.
Air recirculation The indicator light will flash twice, and then
Voice Recognition logic (if so
the intake air will be controlled automati-
equipped) Press the air recirculation button to cally.
When the climate control system is on, the recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
front and rear fan speeds may be auto- The indicator light on the button will A/C (air conditioner) operation
matically lowered so that commands are come on. Start the engine, turn the fan speed
more easily recognized. Fan speed can be The air recirculation cannot be activated control dial to the desired position and
adjusted using the fan speed decrease and when the air conditioner is in the press the CLIMATE button on the center
increase buttons, if desired. front defrosting mode. multi-function control panel. Touch the
“A/C” key on the screen to turn on the air
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,
touch the “A/C” key again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air flow control To change climate settings when SYNC is To turn system off
active (the SYNC indicator is on):
Pressing the MODE button manually con- Press the ON-OFF button to turn the sys-
trols air flow and selects the air outlet: ∙ The driver’s side temperature control tem off.
dial will control the driver, front passen-
— Air flows from center and side ger, and rear (if rear climate is on) tem- To turn system on
vents. peratures. Press the ON-OFF button when the heater
— Air flows from center and side
∙ The fan speed control dial will control or air conditioner is off. The system will turn
vents and foot outlets. on with the settings that were used imme-
— Air flows mainly from foot the front and rear climate fan speeds.
diately before the system was turned off.
outlets. ∙ The front AUTO (automatic) climate
— Air flows from defroster and control ON-OFF button will activate the CLIMATE button
foot outlets. front and rear climate automatic set-
Press the CLIMATE button on the multi-
tings.
Synchronize climate settings function control panel to display the screen
Press the SYNC button to synchronize cli- To exit SYNC: for front air conditioner operations.
mate settings. The sync indicator will turn ∙ To remove the front passenger from Rear window and outside mirror
on and SYNC text will appear in the Climate SYNC, turn the passenger’s side tem-
display. (if so equipped) defroster switch
perature control dial. The driver and rear
When rear climate is off, pressing SYNC will settings remain in SYNC until rear is re- For additional information, refer to “Rear
synchronize only driver’s and front passen- moved from SYNC. window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
ger’s climate settings. When rear climate is defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
∙ To remove the rear from SYNC, change controls” section of this manual.
on, pressing SYNC will synchronize driver, any of the rear climate settings. The
front passenger, and rear temperature and driver and front passenger settings re-
fan settings. main in SYNC until the front passenger
is removed from SYNC.
∙ To reactivate SYNC press the SYNC but-
ton.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

 ∙ When the climate system is in auto- ∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
matic operation and the engine coolant closed while the air conditioner is in op-
temperature and outside air tempera- eration.
ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
fault to defroster mode for a maximum
have selected and the outlets the air is
of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a
coming out do not match, select
malfunction. After the engine coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow out- the mode.
let will return to foot mode and opera- ∙ When you change the air flow mode,
tion will continue normally. you may feel air flow from the feet vents
∙ When the outside and interior cabin for just a moment. This is not a mal-
temperatures are moderate to high, the function.
intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
LHA2473 passenger compartment. You may no-
OPERATING TIPS tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode or side demist vent outlets for a
The sunload sensor, located on the top maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-
driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps cur when the previous climate setting
the system maintain a constant tempera- was turned off. This is not a malfunction.
ture. Do not put anything on or around this After the initial warm air is expelled, the
sensor. intake will return to automatic control,
the air flow outlet will return to previous
settings, and operation will continue
normally. To exit, press any climate con-
trol button.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 To control the rear automatic air condition-
ing system using the front air conditioner
control panel, press the REAR CTRL button.
The front display will switch to the Rear
Climate screen.
To adjust the front air conditioning system,
press the CLIMATE button on the center
multi-function control panel.
Automatic operation
1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indi-
cator will illuminate in the display.
2. Turn the temperature control dials to
LHA4777 set desired temperature. Temperature
Front Controls can be controlled using the display
REAR AUTOMATIC AIR To turn on the rear automatic air condition- screen. Touch the “ ““ ” keys to
ing system with the front air conditioner set the desired temperature.
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
control panel, press the REAR ON-OFF but- Manual operation
1. REAR ON-OFF button ton.
∙ Temperature control
2. REAR CTRL (Rear Climate display The rear automatic air conditioning sys- Turn the temperature control dial to set
screen) button tem can be adjusted with the front air con- the desired temperature.
ditioner control panel when the Rear Cli-
3. ON-OFF button/ fan speed con- mate screen is displayed. ∙ Fan speed control
trol dial Turn the Fan speed control dial to
To control the rear automatic air condition- manually control the fan speed. Fan
4. AUTO button/ temperature control dial ing system using the display, press the CLI- speed can also be controlled using the
(driver’s side) MATE button on the center multi-function display screen. Touch the “ ” or
control panel and touch the “Rear Climate”
“ ” key to set the desired fan speed.
key displayed on the screen. The front dis-
play will switch to the Rear Climate screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
 Turning the system off using the display
screen
1. To turn the system off using the display
screen, press the CLIMATE button on
the center multi-function control panel
until the Rear Climate screen is dis-
played. When the display shows front
climate control, touch the “Rear Cli-
mate” key displayed on the screen.
2. Touch the “ ON/OFF” key to turn
off the rear controls in the Rear Climate
display screen.

LHA4861 LHA4862
Rear Heating Turning the system off
1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indi- ∙ Press the REAR ON-OFF button on the
cator will illuminate in the display. Or, front control panel to turn the Rear Cli-
using the touch-screen display, touch mate system off. The indicator light will
the “AUTO” key on the display and the turn off.
feature will activate.
∙ Press the ON-OFF button. The rear cli-
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set mate controls will turn off.
the desired temperature.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Doing so
may cause the temperature to not be
controlled properly.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

 ∙ Fan speed increase and
decrease buttons Adjusts the rear fan
speed up or down.
∙ AUTO button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system on, AUTO mode
on.

∙ Temperature increase and

decrease buttons Adjusts the rear
temperature up or down.

LHA2134
Rear Controls
Rear control buttons The rear seat passengers can adjust the
rear automatic air conditioning system us-
1. OFF button
ing the control switches at the rear of the
2. Fan speed (increase) button center console.
The rear control buttons do not function
3. AUTO button when the Rear Climate screen is shown on
4. Temperature (increase) button the front display. To activate the rear con-
trol buttons, press the CLIMATE button and
5. Temperature (decrease) button the screen will return to Front Climate con-
6. Display trol. This will enable the second row Rear
Climate controls.
7. Fan speed (decrease) button
∙ OFF button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
LHA4870 LHA4869
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN 1st row 2nd row
dealer to service your “environmentally There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo- NOTE:
friendly” air conditioner system. cated in 1st row in the front media pocket The USB/iPod® charging ports will not
below the climate controls and in the 2nd operate with the display screen or the
WARNING row on the back of the center console. Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (if
The air conditioner system contains re- These ports will charge compatible de- so equipped). Only the USB connection
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid vices. port located in the console box will allow
personal injury, any air conditioner ser- operation of USB/iPod® devices through
vice should be done only by an experi- the audio system.
enced technician with proper
equipment.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION
antenna and an antenna pattern is printed phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
inside the rear window. the following precautions; otherwise, the ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control
CAUTION engine control system and other electronic modules.
parts. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
∙ Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal (20 cm) away from the electronic con-
WARNING trol system harnesses. Do not route
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise. ∙ A cellular phone should not be used the antenna wire next to any harness.
for any purpose while driving so full ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear
attention may be given to vehicle op- ratio as recommended by the
window, be careful not to scratch or
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit manufacturer.
damage the rear window antenna.
the use of cellular phones while
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a ∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
driving.
dampened soft cloth. radio chassis to the body.
∙ If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- ∙ For additional information, it is rec-
lar phone operational mode is highly ommended that you visit a NISSAN
recommended. Exercise extreme cau- dealer for servicing.
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Continuously Variable Transmission

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-22
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
On-pavement and off-road driving How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-25
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-32
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 How to enable/disable the RCTA
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-43
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
 The ICC switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
ICC system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Rise-up and build-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-78
AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
I–4x4 system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-81
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING

WARNING ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ∙ The exhaust system and body should
entering the vehicle, drive with all be inspected by a qualified mechanic
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
windows fully open, and have the ve- whenever:
would normally require the assis-
hicle inspected immediately.
tance of others alone in your vehicle. a. The vehicle is raised for service.
Pets should also not be left alone. ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
They could accidentally injure them- such as a garage.
are entering into the passenger
selves or others through inadvertent
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en- compartment.
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
gine running for any extended length
sunny days, temperatures in a closed c. You notice a change in the sound of
of time.
vehicle could quickly become high the exhaust system.
enough to cause severe or possibly ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
d. You have had an accident involving
fatal injuries to people or animals. doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
damage to the exhaust system,
closed while driving, otherwise ex-
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
haust gases could be drawn into the
straps to help prevent it from sliding
passenger compartment. If you must THREE-WAY CATALYST
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
drive with one of these open, follow
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
these precautions:
or collision, unsecured cargo could trol device installed in the exhaust system.
cause personal injury. 1. Open all the windows. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
air recirculation but- are burned at high temperatures to help
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) 2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to reduce pollutants.
WARNING high to circulate the air.
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer ∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
contain colorless and odorless carbon tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- through the seal on the liftgate or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s rec- mals or flammable materials away
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness from the exhaust system
or death. ommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle. components.

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
flammable materials such as dry start the engine. tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
grass, waste paper or rags. They may the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
ignite and cause a fire. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
SYSTEM (TPMS) has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
CAUTION nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability mended by the vehicle manufacturer on when the system is not operating properly.
to help reduce exhaust pollutants. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- size than the size indicated on the vehicle
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or When the system detects a malfunction,
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the telltale will flash for approximately one
electrical systems can cause overrich should determine the proper tire inflation
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, minute and then remain continuously illu-
pressure for those tires.) minated. This sequence will continue upon
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no- As an added safety feature, your vehicle subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
ticeable loss of performance or other has been equipped with a Tire Pressure the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
unusual operating conditions are de- Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates tion indicator is illuminated, the system
tected. Have the vehicle inspected a low tire pressure telltale when one or may not be able to detect or signal low tire
promptly. It is recommended that you more of your tires is significantly under- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
pressure telltale illuminates, you should ing the installation of replacement or alter-
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
stop and check your tires as soon as pos- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
sure. Driving on a significantly under- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
ing the three-way catalyst.
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and telltale after replacing one or more tires or
∙ Do not race the engine while warming can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
it up. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, replacement or alternate tires and wheels
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and allow the TPMS to continue to function
stopping ability. properly.
Starting and driving 5-3
Additional information: ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- ∙ You can also check the pressure of all
ing appears each time the ignition tires (except the spare tire) on the ve-
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
switch is placed in the on position as hicle information display screen. The or-
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
long as the low tire pressure warning der of the tire pressure figures dis-
does not monitor the tire pressure of
light remains illuminated. played on the screen corresponds with
the spare tire.
the actual order of the tire position.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
ing does not appear if the low tire pres- For additional information, refer to “Low tire
vehicle is driven at speeds above
sure warning light illuminates to indi- pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
cate a TPMS malfunction. and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
sure (for example, a flat tire while driv- ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
emergency” section of this manual.
ing). on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-
eration and the outside temperature.
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does WARNING
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
not automatically turn off when the tire ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
driving because the tire pressure rises
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- electric medical equipment. Those
after driving. Low outside temperature
flated to the recommended pressure, who use a pacemaker should contact
can lower the temperature of the air
the vehicle must be driven at speeds the electric medical equipment
inside the tire which can cause a lower
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the manufacturer for the possible influ-
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure ences before use.
the low tire pressure warning light to
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
illuminate. If the warning light illumi-
to check the tire pressure.
nates, check the tire pressure for all four
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- tires.
ing appears in the vehicle information
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
display when the low tire pressure
is located in the driver’s door opening.
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning turns off when
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light ∙ When replacing a wheel without the ∙ Do not place metalized film or any
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is dows. This may cause poor reception
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off replaced, tire pressure will not be indi- of the signals from the tire pressure
the road to a safe location and stop cated, the TPMS will not function and sensors, and the TPMS will not func-
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- the low tire pressure warning light will tion properly.
ing with under-inflated tires may per- flash for approximately 1 minute. The
manently damage the tires and in- light will remain on after 1 minute. Some devices and transmitters may tem-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS porarily interfere with the operation of the
Serious vehicle damage could occur system reset as soon as possible. It is TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
and may lead to an accident and could recommended that you visit a NISSAN warning light to illuminate.
result in serious personal injury. dealer for this service. Some examples are:
Check the tire pressure for all four
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- ∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
nally specified by NISSAN could affect radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
recommended COLD tire pressure
the proper operation of the TPMS.
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
mation label to turn the low tire pres- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol cies is being used in or near the vehicle.
sure warning light off. If you have a flat tire sealant into the tires, as this may
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon cause a malfunction of the tire pres- ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
as possible. (For additional informa- sure sensors. a DC/AC converter is being used in or
tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of near the vehicle.
emergency” section for changing a CAUTION The low tire pressure warning light may
flat tire.) illuminate in the following cases.
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
tire chains or the wheels are buried in and tire without TPMS.
snow.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
Starting and driving 5-5
FCC Notice: visual and audible signals outside the ve- ∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- within approximately 15 seconds af-
For USA:
ommended COLD tire pressure. ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-
This device complies with Part 15 of the cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
Vehicle set-up
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- not operating.
lowing two conditions: (1) This device 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill
may not cause harmful interference, and
2. Apply the parking brake and place the Tire Alert under the following conditions:
(2) this device must accept any interfer- shift lever in the P (Park) position.
ence received, including interference – If there is interference from an exter-
that may cause undesired operation. 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- nal device or transmitter.
sition. Do not start the engine.
NOTE: – The air pressure from the inflation
Operation device is not sufficient to inflate the
Changes or modifications not expressly 1. Add air to the tire. tire.
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author- 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- – There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
ity to operate the equipment. tors will start flashing. – There is a malfunction in the horn or
For Canada: 3. When the designated pressure is hazard indicators.
reached, the horn beeps once and the
This device complies with Industry – The identification code of the tire
hazard indicators stop flashing.
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). pressure sensor is not registered to
Operation is subject to the following two 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. the system.
conditions: (1) this device may not cause ∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than – The battery of the tire pressure sen-
interference, and (2) this device must ac- approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn sor is low.
cept any interference, including interfer- beeps and the hazard indicators
ence that may cause undesired opera- ∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-
flash three times. To correct the pres-
tion of the device. erate due to TPMS interference, move
sure, push the core of the valve stem
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert on the tire briefly to release pressure.
or forward and try again.
When the pressure reaches the des-
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, ignated pressure, the horn beeps If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides once. tire pressure gauge.
5-6 Starting and driving
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD AVOIDING COLLISION AND Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ROLLOVER collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
Utility vehicles have a significantly is significantly more likely to be injured
higher rollover rate than other types of WARNING or killed than a person properly wearing
vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe a seat belt.
and prudent manner may result in loss
They have higher ground clearance than OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
of control or an accident.
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement Be alert and drive defensively at all times. While driving, the right side or left side
and off-road applications. This gives them wheels may unintentionally leave the road
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve- surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
hicles. An advantage of higher ground the vehicle by following the procedure be-
steering maneuvers, because these driving low. Please note that this procedure is only
clearance is a better view of the road, allow- practices could cause you to lose control of
ing you to anticipate problems. However, a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
your vehicle. as appropriate based on the conditions of
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel As with any vehicle, loss of control could the vehicle, road and traffic.
Drive vehicles any more than low-slung result in a collision with other vehicles or 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
sports cars are designed to perform satis- objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all particularly if the loss of control causes 2. Do not apply the brakes.
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. the vehicle to slide sideways. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to wheel with both hands and try to hold a
operate this vehicle correctly may result in Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
straight course.
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll- when tired. Never drive when under the in-
over crash, an unbelted person is signifi- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- 4. When appropriate, slowly release the
cantly more likely to die than a person scription or over-the-counter drugs which accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
wearing a seat belt. may cause drowsiness). Always wear your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Driving seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
safety precautions” in this section. seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.

Starting and driving 5-7

 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle maintaining the correct air pressure and
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to visually inspecting the tires for wear and 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
drive the vehicle back onto the road damage. For additional information, refer wheel with both hands and try to hold a
surface until vehicle speed is reduced. to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” straight course.
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses 3. When appropriate, slowly release the
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
the steering wheel until both tires re-
maintain control of the vehicle by following vehicle.
turn to the road surface. When all tires
the procedure below. Please note that this
are on the road surface, steer the ve- 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
procedure is only a general guide. The ve-
hicle to stay in the appropriate driving
hicle must be driven as appropriate based location off the road and away from
lane.
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic if possible.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re- traffic.
turn the vehicle to the road surface 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
based on vehicle, road or traffic con- WARNING ally stop the vehicle.
ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
The following actions can increase the
stop in a safe place off the road. and contact a roadside emergency
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- service to change the tire. For addi-
sure. Losing control of the vehicle may tional information, refer to “Changing a
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can cause a collision and result in personal flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged injury. section of this manual.
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving ∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
on under-inflated tires. in the direction of the flat tire.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
at highway speeds. pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

5-8 Starting and driving

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is ∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
DRIVING impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other avoid dangerous areas. Every person
physical condition. who drives or rides in this vehicle
WARNING DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
Never drive under the influence of alco- Your NISSAN is designed for both normal passengers in position when driving
hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream over rough terrain.
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
reduces coordination, delays reaction
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is ∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a stead drive either straight up or
likelihood of being involved in an acci- conventional off-road vehicle. straight down the slopes. Off-road ve-
dent injuring yourself and others. Addi- Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod- hicles can tip over sideways much
tionally, if you are injured in an accident, els are less capable than 4-Wheel Drive more easily than they can forward or
alcohol can increase the severity of the (4WD) models for rough road driving and backward.
injury. extrication when stuck in deep snow or ∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- mud, or the like. hicle. If you drive up them, you may
ever, you must choose not to drive under stall. If you drive down them, you may
Please observe the following precautions: not be able to control your speed. If
the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-
sands of people are injured or killed in you drive across them, you may roll
WARNING over.
alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-
cal laws vary on what is considered to be ∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery ∙ Do not shift gears while driving on
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol surfaces may cause the 4WD warning downhill grades as this could cause
message to display and the 4WD sys- loss of control of the vehicle.
affects all people differently and most
tem to automatically switch from the
people underestimate the effects of alco- ∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
4WD to the 2WD mode. This could re-
hol. duce the traction. Be especially care- hill. At the top there could be a drop-
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! ful when towing a trailer (4WD off or other hazard that could cause
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, models). an accident.
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot ∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure ∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
make it to the top of a steep hill, never that the driver and all passengers equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-
attempt to turn around. Your vehicle have their seat belts fastened. mometer (such as the dynamometers
could tip or roll over. Always back used by some states for emissions
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in
straight down in R (Reverse) gear and testing), or similar equipment even if
place as the floor may become hot.
apply brakes to control your speed. the other two wheels are raised off the
∙ Lower your speed when encountering ground. Make sure you inform test fa-
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
strong crosswinds. With a higher cen- cility personnel that your vehicle is
cause your brakes to overheat and
ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- equipped with 4WD before it is placed
fade, resulting in loss of control and
fected by strong side winds. Slower on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
an accident. Apply brakes lightly and
speeds ensure better vehicle control. test equipment may result in drive-
use a low gear to control your speed.
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance train damage or unexpected vehicle
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown movement which could result in seri-
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
around when driving over rough ter- ous vehicle damage or personal
engaged.
rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will injury.
not be thrown forward and cause in- ∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
tempt to raise two wheels off the ∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to
jury to you or your passengers.
ground and shift the transmission to an unlevel surface, do not spin the
∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area wheel excessively.
any drive or reverse position with the
as far forward and as low as possible.
engine running. Doing so may result ∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
Do not equip the vehicle with tires
in drivetrain damage or unexpected maneuvers or sudden braking may
larger than specified in this manual.
vehicle movement which could result cause loss of control.
This could cause your vehicle to roll
in serious vehicle damage or personal
over. ∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
injury.
maneuvers, particularly at high
∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a
steering wheel when driving off-road.
higher center of gravity than a pas-
The steering wheel could move sud-
senger car. The vehicle is not de-
denly and injure your hands. Instead
signed for cornering at the same
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
speeds as passenger cars.
the outside of the rim.

5-10 Starting and driving

 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

∙ Failure to operate this vehicle cor- WARNING

rectly could result in loss of control
Do not operate the push-button igni-
and/or a rollover accident.
tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
∙ Always use tires of the same type, cept in an emergency. (The engine will
size, brand, construction (bias, bias- stop when the ignition switch is pushed
belted, or radial), and tread pattern on three consecutive times in quick suc-
all four wheels. Install tire chains on cession or the ignition switch is pushed
the front wheels when driving on slip- and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
pery roads and drive carefully. engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-
serious injury.
ately after driving in mud or water. For
additional information, refer to “Brake
system” in this section.
LSD2014
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it When the ignition switch is pushed without
rolls forward, backward or sideways, depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
you could be injured. switch will illuminate.
∙ Whenever you drive off-road through Push the ignition switch center:
sand, mud or water as deep as the
∙ Once to change to ACC.
wheel hub, more frequent mainte-
nance may be required. For additional ∙ Two times to change to ON.
information, refer to “Severe driving
conditions” in the “Maintenance and ∙ Three times to return to OFF.
schedules” section of this manual. The ignition switch will automatically re-
turn to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-11

The ignition lock is designed so that the one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
ignition switch position cannot be to push the ignition switch to start the en-
switched to OFF until the shift lever is gine.
moved to the P (Park) position.
The operating range of the engine start
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed function is inside of the vehicle 䊊
1 .
toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-
lows: ∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- may function.
tion.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition instrument panel or inside the glove
switch position will change to the ON box, storage bin or door pocket, the In-
position. telligent Key may not function.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the LSD2020 ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
OFF position. door or window outside the vehicle, the
OPERATING RANGE
The shift lever can be moved from the P Intelligent Key may function.
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed. specified operating range. POSITIONS
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, When the Intelligent Key battery is almost LOCK (Normal parking position)
the ignition switch cannot be moved discharged or strong radio waves are pres- The ignition switch can only be locked in
from the LOCK position. ent near the operating location, the Intelli- this position.
gent Key system’s operating range be-
Some indicators and warnings for opera- The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
comes narrower and may not function
tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- is pushed to the ACC position while carry-
tion display. For additional information, re- properly.
ing the Intelligent Key.
fer to “Vehicle information display” in the If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
“Instruments and controls” section of this range, it is possible for anyone, even some- The ignition switch will lock when any door
manual. is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
5-12 Starting and driving
ACC (Accessories) The battery saver feature will be canceled if EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
any of the following occur:
This position activates electrical accesso- To shut off the engine in an emergency
ries, such as the radio, when the engine is ∙ Any door is opened. situation while driving, perform the follow-
not running. ∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P ing procedure:
ACC has a battery saver feature that will (Park) position. ∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three
place the ignition switch in the OFF position ∙ The ignition switch changes position. consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-
after a period of time under the following onds, or
conditions: CAUTION ∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for
∙ All doors are closed. Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- more than 2 seconds.
tion switch in the ACC or ON position
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
when the engine is not running for an
The battery saver feature will be canceled if extended period. This can discharge the
any of the following occur: battery.
∙ Any door is opened. OFF
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park). The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
∙ The ignition switch changes position. ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on
ON (Normal operating position) the ignition switch.
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
Starting and driving 5-13
 After step 3 is performed, when the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
ignition switch is pushed without de- SYSTEM
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to ACC. The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
4. Push the ignition switch while depress- the use of the registered key.
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will If the engine fails to start using a registered
start. key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
NOTE: mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
engine using the following procedure:
the ACC or ON position or the engine
is started by the above procedure, the 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
SSD0860 Intelligent Key battery discharge in- sition for approximately 5 seconds.
dicator appears in the vehicle infor-
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® mation display even when the Intelli-
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
BATTERY DISCHARGE LOCK position, and wait approximately
gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
10 seconds.
not a malfunction. To turn off the In-
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® telligent Key battery discharge indi- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
is discharged, or environmental conditions cator, touch the ignition switch with
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, the Intelligent Key again. 4. Restart the engine while holding the
start the engine according to the following device (which may have caused the in-
procedure: ∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis- terference) separate from the regis-
charge indicator appears, replace the tered key.
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi- battery as soon as possible. For addi-
tion. tional information, refer to “Battery If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” recommends placing the registered key on
2. Firmly apply the foot brake. a separate key ring to avoid interference
section of this manual.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- from other devices.
ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
5-14 Starting and driving
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the LOCK position. After
clear. cranking the engine, release the ac-
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, celerator pedal. Crank the engine
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
coolant, brake fluid, and windshield- with your foot off the accelerator
washer fluid as frequently as possible, The starter is designed not to oper- pedal by depressing the brake pedal
or at least whenever you refuel. ate if the shift lever is in any of the and pushing the ignition switch to
driving positions. start the engine. If the engine starts,
∙ Check that all windows and lights are but fails to run, repeat the above pro-
clean. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-
cedure.
sition. Depress the brake pedal and
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear- push the ignition switch to start the
ance and condition. Also check tires for engine. CAUTION
proper inflation. Do not operate the starter for more
To start the engine immediately, push
∙ Check that all doors are closed. than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
and release the ignition switch while
does not start, push the ignition switch
∙ Position seat and adjust head depressing the brake pedal with the
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
restraints/headrests. ignition switch in any position.
before cranking again, otherwise the
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in starter could be damaged.
extremely cold weather or when re-
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- starting, depress the accelerator 4. Warm-up:
gers to do likewise. pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the Allow the engine to idle for at least
∙ Check the operation of warning lights floor) and while holding, crank the en- 30 seconds after starting. Do not race
when the ignition switch is placed in the gine. Release the accelerator pedal the engine while warming it up. Drive at
ON position. For additional information, when the engine starts. a moderate speed for a short distance
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights ∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- first, especially in cold weather. In cold
and audible reminders” in the “Instru- cause it is flooded, depress the accel- weather, keep the engine running for a
ments and controls” section of this erator pedal all the way to the floor minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before
manual. and hold it. Push the ignition switch shutting it off. Starting and stopping
to the ON position to start cranking the engine over a short period of time
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop may make the vehicle more difficult to
cranking by pushing the ignition start.
Starting and driving 5-15
 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
to the P (Park) position and push the you. TRANSMISSION (CVT)
ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Apply the brake.
WARNING
NOTE: 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position. ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
Care should be taken to avoid situations while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
that can lead to potential battery dis- For additional information, refer to “NISSAN tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or L (Low).
charge and potential no-start conditions Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks Always depress the brake pedal until
such as: and adjustments” section of this manual. shifting is completed. Failure to do so
1. Installation or extended use of elec- could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD caution when shifting into a forward
players, etc.). or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
In these cases, the battery may need to control.
be charged to maintain battery health.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so (Reverse) position while the vehicle is
equipped) moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine versing. This could cause an accident
Start require the ignition switch to be or damage the transmission.
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:

5-16 Starting and driving

 CAUTION Starting the vehicle WARNING
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- 1. After starting the engine, fully depress ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an the foot brake pedal before moving the while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by shift lever out of the P (Park) position. tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
depressing the accelerator pedal. The This Continuously Variable Transmis- Always depress the brake pedal until
foot brake should be used for this sion is designed so that the foot shifting is completed. Failure to do so
purpose. brake pedal must be depressed be- could cause you to lose control and
fore shifting from P (Park) to any driv- have an accident.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv- ing position while the ignition switch ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
ing. Coasting with the transmission in is in the ON position. caution when shifting into a forward
the N (Neutral) position may cause se- The shift lever cannot be moved out or reverse gear before the engine has
rious damage to the transmission. of the P (Park) position and into any warmed up.
of the other positions if the ignition
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or roads. This may cause a loss of
controlled to produce maximum power ACC position while the ready light il-
and smooth operation. control.
luminates.
The recommended operating procedures ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed (Reverse) position while the vehicle is
for this transmission are shown on the fol- and move the shift lever to a driving moving forward and P (Park) or D
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for position. (Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
maximum vehicle performance and driv- versing. This could cause an accident
ing enjoyment. 3. Release the parking brake and foot
or damage the transmission.
brake pedal and then gradually start
Engine power may be automatically re- the vehicle in motion.
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting and driving 5-17

 CAUTION WARNING
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an is in any position while the engine is not
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by running. Failure to do so could cause
depressing the accelerator pedal. The the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
foot brake should be used for this away and result in serious personal in-
purpose. jury or property damage.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv- CAUTION
ing. Coasting with the transmission in Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
the N (Neutral) position may cause se- only when the vehicle is completely
rious damage to the transmission. stopped.
LSD2127 P (Park)
Shifting
CAUTION
Press the button 䊊
A while depressing
To prevent transmission damage, use
the brake pedal
the P (Park) position only when the ve-
Press the button 䊊
A to shift hicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
Shift without pressing the 䊊
A button
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
After starting the engine, fully depress the stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
brake pedal, press the shift lever button pressed and the shift lever button
and move the shift lever from the P (Park) pressed to move the shift lever from N
position to any of the desired shift posi- (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
tions. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
5-18 Starting and driving
R (Reverse) 4. Push down the shift lock release 䊊
B
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION 5. Press the shift lever button 䊊 C and
To prevent transmission damage, use move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
the R (Reverse) position only when the position 䊊 D while holding down the
vehicle is completely stopped. shift lock release. The vehicle may be
moved to the desired location. Replace
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make the removed shift lock release cover
sure the vehicle is completely stopped be- after the operation. If the shift lever
fore selecting the R (Reverse) position. The cannot be moved out of the P (Park)
brake pedal must be depressed and the position, have the Continuously Vari-
shift lever button pressed to move the able Transmission system checked as
shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any soon as possible. It is recommended
drive position to R (Reverse). that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
LSD2128 service.
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Shift lock release
The engine can be started in this position. WARNING
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a the shift lever may not be moved from the If the shift lever cannot be moved from
stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. the P (Park) position while the engine is
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
D (Drive) depressed and the shift lever button running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
pressed. To move the shift lever, perform
Use this position for all normal forward Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
driving. the following procedure:
an accident injuring yourself and
L (Low) 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or others.
LOCK position.
Use this position for engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep 2. Apply the parking brake.
slopes and whenever approaching sharp 3. Remove the shift lock release cover 䊊
A
bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in using a suitable tool.
any other circumstances.

Starting and driving 5-19

 Each time the engine is started, or when Fail-safe
the shift lever is moved to any position
other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF If the vehicle is driven under extreme
mode will be automatically turned off. conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
Accelerator downshift the fail-safe system may be activated.
— in D (Drive) position — The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
For passing or hill climbing, depress the may come on to indicate the fail-safe
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts mode is activated. For additional infor-
the transmission down into a lower gear, mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
depending on the vehicle speed. Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual. This will oc-
High fluid temperature protection cur even if all electrical circuits are func-
mode tioning properly. In this case, place the
LSD2246 ignition switch in the OFF position and
This transmission has a high fluid tem-
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch wait for 10 seconds. Then push the
perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-
perature becomes too high (for example, switch back to the ON position. The ve-
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with hicle should return to its normal operat-
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, when climbing steep grades in high tem-
peratures with heavy loads, such as when ing condition. If it does not return to its
the light in the instrument panel illu- towing a trailer), engine power and, under normal operating condition, have the
minates. For additional information, refer some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- transmission checked and repaired, if
to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In- creased automatically to reduce the necessary. It is recommended that you
struments and controls” section of this chance of transmission damage. Vehicle visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
manual. speed can be controlled with the accelera-
Use the overdrive OFF mode when you tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
need improved engine braking. may be limited.
To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push
the O/D OFF switch again. The indi-
cator light will turn off.

5-20 Starting and driving

 PARKING BRAKE

WARNING WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro- ∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- leased before driving. Failure to do so
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re- can cause brake failure and lead to an
duced. The reduced speed may be lower accident.
than other traffic, which could increase
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
the chance of a collision. Be especially
outside the vehicle.
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
and allow the transmission to return to the parking brake. When parking, be
normal operation, or have it repaired if sure the parking brake is fully
necessary. engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the LSD0158
vehicle and/or its systems, do not To engage: Firmly depress the parking
leave children, people who require the brake.
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally, To release:
the temperature inside a closed ve- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi- 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
cant risk of injury or death to people sition.
and pets. 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-
ing light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-21

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direc-
tion your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system. LSD2707 SSD1030
The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 1 Detection zone
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detec-
changing lanes.
tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-
tion zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-22 Starting and driving

 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 mph (32km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected ve-
hicles leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-
nates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-
cator light is adjusted automatically de-
pending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-
tional information, refer to “BSW driving
LSD2765 situations” in this section.
Starting and driving 5-23
The BSW system automatically turns on
every time the engine is started, as long as
it is activated using the settings menu on
the vehicle information display.

LSD2764

5-24 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE ∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
BSW SYSTEM integrated into the BSW system. height vehicles, or high ground
There is not a separate selection in clearance vehicles.
When the BSW system is enabled in the
the vehicle information display for
vehicle information display, the system can – Oncoming vehicles.
the RCTA system. When the BSW is
be turned off by pushing the warning sys-
disabled, the RCTA system is also dis- – Vehicles remaining in the detec-
tems switch. For additional information, re-
abled. tion zone when you accelerate
fer to “Warning systems switch” in the “In-
from a stop.
struments and controls” section of this ∙ When the BSW system is turned on,
manual. the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the – A vehicle merging into an adjacent
vehicle information display illumi- lane at a speed approximately the
Perform the following steps to enable or same as your vehicle.
nates.
disable the BSW system.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle approaching rapidly from
1. Press the button until “Settings” behind.
displays in the vehicle information dis-
WARNING – A vehicle which your vehicle over-
play. Use the button to select takes rapidly.
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN- Listed below are the system limitations
TER button. for the BSW system. Failure to operate – A vehicle that passes through the
the vehicle in accordance with these detection zone quickly.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-
system limitations could result in seri- – When overtaking several vehicles
TER button.
ous injury or death. in a row, the vehicles after the first
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER ∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve- vehicle may not be detected if they
button. hicles under all conditions. are traveling close together.
4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys- ∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
tem on or off. detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
NOTE:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current set-
tings even if the engine is restarted.
Starting and driving 5-25
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
designed based on a standard lane system volume, open vehicle window)
width. When driving in a wider lane, will interfere with the chime sound,
the radar sensors may not detect ve- and it may not be heard.
hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-
ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-
nore most stationary objects; how-
ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may oc-
casionally be detected. This is a nor-
mal operation condition. LSD2299
∙ The following conditions may reduce Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
the ability of the radar to detect other BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
vehicles:
Indicator on
– Severe weather
– Road spray Indicator off
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle Indicator flashing
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accesso-
ries or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to de-
tect other vehicles.

5-26 Starting and driving

Another vehicle approaching ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
from behind before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator but no chime will sound when the
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- other vehicle is detected.
tection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.

LSD2300
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.

Starting and driving 5-27

 ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 LSD2303
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another Illustration 4 – Overtaking another
vehicle vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes
minates if you overtake a vehicle and that (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-
proximately 2 seconds. NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are trav-
eling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
5-28 Starting and driving
 ∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.

LSD2305 LSD2308
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes
minates if a vehicle enters the detection
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
zone from either side.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-29

 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
(white) will blink 䊊
A in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
The system is not available until the condi-
tions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-
tion may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-
sors.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2763

5-30 Starting and driving

Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn additional paint near the radar sensors.
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi- Do not strike or damage the area around
cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in- the radar sensors. It is recommended that
formation display. you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area
around the radar sensors is damaged due
NOTE: to a collision.
If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working. For USA
Action to take: FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the LSD2707 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules.
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system The two radar sensors 䊊
1 for the BSW and Operation is subject to the following two
checked. It is recommended that you visit a RCTA systems are located near the rear conditions:
NISSAN dealer for this service. bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in-
dar sensors clean. terference, and
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer-
porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference
ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation.
The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority
the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment.
Starting and driving 5-31
 REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz WARNING

Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts Failure to follow the warnings and in-
This device complies with Industry Canada structions for proper use of the RCTA
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation system could result in serious injury or
is subject to the following two conditions: death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
1. This device may not cause interference,
for proper driving procedures and is
and
not designed to prevent contact with
2. This device must accept any interfer- vehicles or objects. When backing out
ence, including interference that may of a parking space, always use the
cause undesired operation of the de- side and rear mirrors and turn and
vice. look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz system.
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts The RCTA system will assist you when
Droit applicable: Canada 310 backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR signed to detect other vehicles approach-
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
5-32 Starting and driving
 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-
ing from.

LSD2765

Starting and driving 5-33

 LSD2216 LSD2707
The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊 1
installed on both sides near the rear bum-
per to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors 䊊 1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

5-34 Starting and driving

 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
1. Press the button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-
TER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-
TER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys-
tem on or off.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.

LSD2764

Starting and driving 5-35

NOTE:
∙ The RCTA system is integrated into
the BSW system. There is not a sepa-
rate selection in the vehicle informa-
tion display for the RCTA system.
When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA
system is also disabled.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained
even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3195
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5-36 Starting and driving

 WARNING – Illustration 䊊
B : When the vehicle is ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
parked in an angled parking space. volume, open vehicle window) will in-
Listed below are the system limitations
– Illustration 䊊
terfere with the chime sound, and it
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate C : When the vehicle is
may not be heard.
the vehicle in accordance with these parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration 䊊
system limitations could result in seri- D : When an approach-
ous injury or death.
ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
∙ Always check surroundings and turn parking lot aisle.
– Illustration 䊊
to check what is behind you before E : When the angle
backing up. The radar sensors detect
formed by your vehicle and ap-
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
proaching vehicle is small
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as: ∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
vehicles:
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles – Severe weather
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds – Road spray
greater than approximately – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
19 mph (30 km/h) the vehicle
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds ∙ Do not attach stickers (including
lower than approximately 5 mph transparent material), install accesso-
(8 km/h) ries or apply additional paint near the
∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap- radar sensors. These conditions may
proaching vehicles in certain reduce the ability of the radar to de-
situations: tect other vehicles
– Illustration 䊊
A : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-37

 LSD2043 LSD2044
Illustration 1 Illustration 2
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approach-
ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-
site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system af-
ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

5-38 Starting and driving

 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
(white) will blink 䊊
A in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2763

Starting and driving 5-39

Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will additional paint near the radar sensors.
turn off automatically. The system mal-
function warning message with the Do not strike or damage the area around
BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the radar sensors. It is recommended that
the vehicle information display. you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area
around the radar sensors is damaged due
NOTE: to a collision.
If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working. For USA
Action to take FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
LSD2707 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Rules.
sage continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a The two radar sensors 䊊
1 for the BSW and Operation is subject to the following two
RCTA systems are located near the rear conditions:
NISSAN dealer for this service.
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- 1. This device may not cause harmful in-
dar sensors clean. terference, and
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- 2. This device must accept any interfer-
porary ambient conditions such as splash- ence received, including interference
ing water, mist or fog. that may cause undesired operation.
The blocked condition may also be caused FCC Warning
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
Check for and remove objects obstructing compliance could void the user’s authority
the area around the radar sensors. to operate the equipment.
5-40 Starting and driving
 CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Applicable law: Canada 310 Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz LSD2218

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

Droit applicable: Canada 310 CONTROL
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR 1. ACCEL/RES switch
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- 2. COAST/SET switch
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- 3. CANCEL switch
antes: 4. ON/OFF switch
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Starting and driving 5-41
 ∙ If the cruise control system malfunc- ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
tions, it cancels automatically. The speed when going up or down steep
indicator illuminates in the vehicle infor- ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). hills. If this happens, drive without the
mation display then blinks to warn the ∙ In very windy areas. cruise control.
driver. For additional information, refer To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle following three methods:
to “Vehicle information display” in the control and result in an accident.
“Instruments and controls” section of ∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the indi-
this manual. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS cator (green) in the vehicle information
The cruise control allows driving at a speed display goes out.
∙ If the indicator blinks, push the
cruise control ON/OFF switch off and between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the indicator
have the system checked. It is recom- out keeping your foot on the accelerator
(green) goes out.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer pedal.
∙ Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch
for this service. To turn on the cruise control, push the
off. The indicator in the vehicle in-
∙ The indicator may blink when the cruise control ON/OFF switch on. The formation display go out.
cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed indicator (white) in the vehicle information The cruise control is automatically can-
ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, display will illuminate.
celed and the indicator (green) in the
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop- To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- vehicle information display goes out if:
erly set the cruise control system, use hicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The ∙ You depress the brake pedal while
the following procedures.
pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET
indicator (green) in the vehicle information
switch. The preset speed is deleted
WARNING display will illuminate. Take your foot off the
from memory.
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
the set speed. ∙ The vehicle slows down more than
ing under the following conditions:
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ When it is not possible to keep the ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the ∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
vehicle at a set speed.
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies ously set speed.
in speed.

5-42 Starting and driving

 INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use To resume the preset speed, push and WARNING
one of the following three methods: release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when Failure to follow the warnings and in-
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When structions for proper use of the ICC sys-
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
the vehicle attains the desired speed, tem could result in serious injury or
push and release the COAST/SET death.
switch.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. the driver and is not a collision warn-
When the vehicle attains the speed you ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-
desire, release the switch. er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES safely, and be in control of the vehicle
switch. Each time you do this, the set at all times.
speed increases by about 1 mph ∙ Always observe posted speed limits
(1.6 km/h). and do not set the speed over them.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods: ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the understand the Owner’s Manual thor-
vehicle attains the desired speed, push oughly before using the ICC system.
the COAST/SET switch and release it. To avoid serious injury or death, do
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. not rely on the system to prevent ac-
Release the switch when the vehicle cidents or to control the vehicle’s
slows to the desired speed. speed in emergency situations. Do
not use the ICC system except in ap-
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET propriate road and traffic conditions.
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-43

 LSD2708
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-
rection.
The ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊 A
located on the front of the vehicle to detect
vehicles traveling ahead.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the
vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is ap-
proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
LSD3340

5-44 Starting and driving

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION warning chime and blink the system dis- The ICC system does not control vehicle
play to notify the driver to take necessary speed or warn you when you approach
The ICC system maintains a selected dis- action. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
tance from the vehicle in front of you within must pay attention to vehicle operation to
the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to For additional information, refer to “Ap-
maintain proper distance from vehicles
144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set proach warning” in this section.
ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-
speed can be selected by the driver be- The following items are controlled in the fic congestion.
tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based ICC system:
on road conditions.
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
The vehicle travels at the set speed when ahead, the ICC system maintains the
the road ahead is clear. speed set by the driver. The set speed
The ICC system is designed to maintain a range is between approximately 20 and
selected distance from the vehicle in front 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
of you and can reduce the speed to match ∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
a slower vehicle ahead. The system will de- the ICC system adjusts the speed to
celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the maintain the distance, selected by the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
system can only apply up to 40% of the decelerates to a standstill within the
vehicle’s total braking power. limitations of the system. The system
This system should only be used when traf- will cancel once it judges a standstill
fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- with a warning chime.
main fairly constant or when vehicle ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moved out from its lane of travel, the
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a ICC system accelerates and maintains
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, vehicle speed up to the set speed.
the distance between vehicles may be-
come closer because the ICC system can-
not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a
Starting and driving 5-45
 Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-
cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accel-
erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-
quired for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-
ing the ICC system.

SSD0254 LSD2739
When driving on the freeway at a set speed THE ICC SWITCH
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed The system is operated by the CRUISE
to maintain the distance, selected by the ON/OFF switch and four control switches,
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle all mounted on the steering wheel.
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, 1. CANCEL switch:
the ICC system will accelerate and main-
tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay Deactivates the system without eras-
attention to the driving operation to main- ing the set speed.
tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates 2. ACCEL/RES switch:
to the set speed.
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally.

5-46 Starting and driving

3. COAST/SET switch: ∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indi-
cates that there is a malfunction in
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
the ICC system.
speed incrementally.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
4. DISTANCE switch:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
Changes the vehicle’s following dis-
tance: For Canadian models, the speed is dis-
played in km/h.
∙ Long
3. Set distance indicator:
∙ Middle
Displays the selected distance be-
∙ Short tween vehicles set with the distance
5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch: switch.
Master switch to activate the system. LSD2285 4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
The ICC system display and Indicates whether it detects a vehicle
indicators in front of you.
The display is located between the speed-
ometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): In-
dicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is ON.
∙ ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set.

Starting and driving 5-47

 ∙ When the shift lever is not in D (Drive)
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-
der the following conditions, the system
cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn
LSD2740 LSD2741
off the ICC system and reset the ICC
Operating ICC To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
hicle to the desired speed, push the switch again.)
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊 A .
system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead For additional information about the
The ICC system ON indicator (white), set detection indicator, set distance indicator VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
distance indicator and set vehicle speed and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊 B will Control (VDC) system” in this section.
indicator come on in a standby state for come on. Take your foot off the accelerator ∙ When ABS or VDC is operating
setting. pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed. ∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un- longer slipping. Push the CRUISE
der the following conditions, the system ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC sys-
cannot be set and the ICC indicators will tem, and reset the ICC system by push-
blink for approximately 2 seconds: ing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
5-48 Starting and driving
 NOTE:
∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-
hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
LSD2288 LSD2289
ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
䊊
1 System set display with vehicle ahead ates your vehicle to resume the previously When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator 䊊 B will flash when the ve-
䊊
2 System set display without vehicle
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed. hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-
ahead hicle detect indicator will turn off when the
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
Vehicle detected ahead vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
When a vehicle is detected in the lane If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- the previously set speed.
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the
hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system is in operation, the system con- ICC system, you can depress the accelera-
ing the brakes to match the speed of a trols the distance to that vehicle. tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
When a vehicle is no longer detected under your vehicle rapidly.
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-
tem will be canceled.
driver selected distance.

Starting and driving 5-49

 ∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The To resume the preset speed, push and
ICC indicators will go out. release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph
one of the following methods: (32 km/h).
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
The set vehicle speed will increase by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push, then quickly release the
LSD2288 ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do
䊊
1 System set display with vehicle ahead this, the set speed will increase by ap-
proximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
䊊
2 System set display without vehicle
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
ahead
one of the following methods:
How to change the set vehicle
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
speed vehicle attains the desired speed, push
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the the COAST/SET switch and release it.
following methods: ∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
hicle speed indicator will go out.
∙ Push, then quickly release the
∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
speed indicator will go out. this, the set speed will decrease by ap-
proximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
5-50 Starting and driving
 Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-
tem warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-
ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-
hicle distance if:
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in
LSD2742 LSD2429 some cases when there is a short distance
How to change the set distance Distance Approximate distance at
between vehicles. Some examples are:
to the vehicle ahead 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
1. Long 200 (60) same speed and the distance between
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be vehicles is not changing.
selected at any time depending on the traf- 2. Middle 150 (45)
fic conditions. 3. Short 90 (30) ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between ve-
Each time the distance switch 䊊A is ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will hicles is increasing.
pushed, the set distance will change to change according to the vehicle speed.
long, middle, short and back to long again, The higher the vehicle speed, the longer ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
in that sequence. the distance.
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine
is started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)

Starting and driving 5-51

The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.

NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects SSD0252
when the vehicle is driven on winding ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when matically to road conditions. This sys-
entering or exiting a curve. In these WARNING tem should be used in evenly flowing
cases you will have to manually control traffic. Do not use the system on roads
the proper distance ahead of your ve- Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in
hicle. heavy rain or in fog.
the vehicle in accordance with these
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected system limitations could result in seri-
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or ous injury or death.
driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-
hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended
being driven with some damage). for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.

5-52 Starting and driving

∙ As there is a performance limit to the ∙ The system may not detect the ve- – Interference by other radar
distance control function, never rely hicle in front of you in certain road or sources
solely on the ICC system. This system weather conditions. To avoid acci-
∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are
does not correct careless, inattentive dents, never use the ICC system under
towing a trailer. The system may not
or absentminded driving, or over- the following conditions:
detect a vehicle ahead.
come poor visibility in rain, fog, or
– On roads where the traffic is heavy
other bad weather. Decelerate the ve- ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a
or there are sharp curves
hicle speed by depressing the brake vehicle or object can unexpectedly
pedal, depending on the distance to – On slippery road surfaces such as come into the sensor detection zone
the vehicle ahead and the surround- on ice or snow, etc. and cause automatic braking. Always
ing circumstances in order to main- stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
tain a safe distance between vehicles. tem where not recommended in this
snow, etc.)
warning section.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill the bumper around the distance The radar sensor will not detect the follow-
within the limitations of the system. sensor ing objects:
The system will cancel once it judges
that the vehicle has come to a stand- – On steep downhill roads (the ve- ∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
still and sound a warning chime. To hicle may go beyond the set ve-
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
prevent the vehicle from moving, the hicle speed and frequent braking
driver must depress the brake pedal. may result in overheating the ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
brakes)
∙ Always pay attention to the operation ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
of the vehicle and be ready to manu- – On repeated uphill and downhill lane
ally control the proper following dis- roads
tance. The ICC system may not be able The following are some conditions in which
– When traffic conditions make it dif- the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-
to maintain the selected distance be- ficult to keep a proper distance be-
tween vehicles (following distance) or hicle ahead and the system may not oper-
tween vehicles because of fre-
selected vehicle speed under some ate properly:
quent acceleration or deceleration
circumstances. ∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

Starting and driving 5-53

 ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s operation within
the limitations of the system.
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-
tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance detection mode to maintain the se-
lected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may SSD0253
not be detected in the same lane ahead if When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
they are traveling offset from the centerline ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the which are under construction, the ICC sen- sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
lane ahead may not be detected until the sor may detect vehicles in a different lane, will have to manually control the proper
vehicle has completely moved into the or may temporarily not detect a vehicle distance away from the vehicle traveling
lane. traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC ahead.
system to decelerate or accelerate the ve-
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn hicle.
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may The detection of vehicles may also be af-
have to manually control the proper dis- fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
tance away from vehicle traveling ahead. neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.

5-54 Starting and driving

 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavail-
able. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-
tem is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in D (Drive)
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips

LSD2615

Starting and driving 5-55

Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC
system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-
structed, the ICC system will automatically
be canceled. If the sensor area is covered
with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl
bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect
vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC
system may not cancel and may not be LSD2411 LSD2395
able to maintain the selected following dis- Action to take Action to take
tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to If the warning light (orange) comes on, park If the warning light comes on, park the ve-
check and clean the sensor area. the vehicle in a safe location and turn the hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
The system warning light (orange) will illu- engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor restart the engine, resume driving and set
minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar window is blocked. If the radar sensor win- the ICC system again.
Obstruction” warning message will appear dow is blocked, remove the blocking mate-
If it is not possible to set the system or
in the vehicle information display. rial. Restart the engine. If the warning light
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
continues to illuminate, have the ICC sys-
When driving on roads with limited road that the system is malfunctioning. Al-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
structures or buildings (for example, or though the vehicle is still drivable under
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving normal conditions, have the vehicle
next to long walls), the system may illumi- Condition C checked. It is recommended that you
nate the system warning light (orange) and visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ICC system is not operating
display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Ob- properly, a chime sounds and the system
struction” message. warning light (orange) will come on.

5-56 Starting and driving

 ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- FCC Warning
parent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure Changes or modifications not expressly
or malfunction. approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the to operate the equipment.
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction. This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
bumper. Before customizing or restor- These limits are designed to provide reason-
ing the front bumper, it is recom- able protection against harmful interference
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. when the equipment is operated in a com-
Radio frequency statement mercial environment. This equipment gen-
erates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
LSD2708 FCC Notice energy and, if not installed and used in ac-
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE For USA cordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio commu-
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
A is located This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC nications. Operation of this equipment in a
on the front of the vehicle. Rules. residential area is likely to cause harmful in-
terference in which case the user will be re-
To keep the ICC system operating properly, Operation is subject to the following two
quired to correct the interference at his own
be sure to observe the following: conditions:
expense.
∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. 1. This device may not cause harmful in-
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-
terference, and
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas mation:
around the sensor. Do not touch or re- 2. This device must accept any interfer-
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
move the screw located on the sensor. ence received, including interference
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
Doing so could cause failure or mal- that may cause undesired operation.
trolled environment. This equipment
function. If the sensor is damaged due should be installed and operated with
to an accident, it is recommended that minimum distance of 20 cm between the
you visit a NISSAN dealer. radiator and your body.
Starting and driving 5-57
 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB)

The transmitter must not be co-located or WARNING

operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter. Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the AEB
For Canada system could result in serious injury or
This device complies with Industry Canada death.
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation ∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid
is subject to the following two conditions: to the driver. It is not a replacement
1. This device must not cause interfer- for the driver’s attention to traffic
ence, conditions or responsibility to drive
safely. It cannot prevent accidents
2. This device must accept any interfer- due to carelessness or dangerous
ence, including interference that may driving techniques.
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice. ∙ The AEB system does not function in LSD2708
all driving, traffic, weather and road
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi- conditions. The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊 A
tions suivantes: located behind the lower grille of the front
The AEB system can assist the driver when bumper to measure the distance to the
1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
lage, vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
et
2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

5-58 Starting and driving

 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB emergency warning indicator
3. AEB system warning light
AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-
mately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will provide an initial warn-
ing to the driver by both a visual and au-
dible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possi-
bility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual warning
(red) and audible warning and also applies
partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking au-
tomatically.

LSD2639

Starting and driving 5-59

NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a colli-
sion, should one be unavoidable. If the
driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-
erating or braking, the AEB system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-
tected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.

LSD2766

5-60 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Dirt, ice, snow or other material
ON/OFF covering the radar sensor.
WARNING
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB – Interference by other radar
systems ON or OFF. Listed below are the system limitations sources.
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
1. Press the button until “Settings” the vehicle in accordance with these – Snow or road spray from traveling
displays in the vehicle information dis- system limitations could result in seri- vehicles.
play. Use the button to select ous injury or death. – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN- motorcycle).
∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-
TER button.
hicles under all conditions. – When driving on a steep downhill
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the slope or roads with sharp curves.
the ENTER button. following objects: ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the
3. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys- – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles AEB system may unexpectedly apply
tem on or off. in the roadway. partial braking. When acceleration is
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB necessary, continue to depress the
system warning light illuminates. – Oncoming vehicles. accelerator pedal to override the
– Crossing vehicles. system.
NOTE: ∙ Braking distances increase on slip-
∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-
The AEB system will be automatically mance limitations. If a stationary ve- pery surfaces.
turned on when the engine is restarted. hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB
system will not function when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-
mately 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-
hicle ahead in the following
conditions:

Starting and driving 5-61

∙ The system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of ob-
structions of the sensor area such as
ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,
the system may not be able to worn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear the sensor area
regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
SSD0253
When driving on some roads such as wind- control the proper distance away from
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads the vehicle traveling ahead.
which are under construction, the sensor
may detect vehicles in a different lane, or
may temporarily not detect a vehicle trav-
eling ahead. This may cause the system to
work inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be af-
fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the sys-
tem may warn you by blinking the sys-
tem indicator and sounding the chime
unexpectedly. You will have to manually

5-62 Starting and driving

 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-
ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-
dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
LSD2616 long walls), the system may illuminate the
Starting and driving 5-63
system warning light (orange) and display ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
message. could cause failure or malfunction.
Action to take ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop bumper. Before customizing or restor-
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift ing the front bumper, it is recom-
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
engine off. Clean the radar cover on the FCC Notice
lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to For USA
illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Rules.
dealer for this service.
LSD2708
Operation is subject to the following two
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION conditions:
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be 1. This device may not cause harmful in-
turned off automatically, a chime will The sensor 䊊 A is located behind the lower terference, and
sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will grille of the front bumper.
2. This device must accept any interfer-
illuminate and the warning message [Mal-
To keep the system operating properly, be ence received, including interference
function] will appear in the vehicle informa-
sure to observe the following: that may cause undesired operation.
tion display.
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front FCC Warning
Action to take
bumper clean.
Changes or modifications not expressly
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas approved by the party responsible for
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
around the sensor. compliance could void the user’s authority
gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-
to operate the equipment.
ing light continues to illuminate, have the ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-
AEB system checked. It is recommended lar objects on the front bumper near This equipment has been tested and found
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- the sensor area. This could cause failure to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
vice. or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
5-64 Starting and driving
 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

Rules. These limits are designed to provide For Canada CAUTION

reasonable protection against harmful in-
This device complies with Industry Canada During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
terference when the equipment is oper-
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation follow these recommendations to ob-
ated in a commercial environment. This
is subject to the following two conditions: tain maximum engine performance
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- 1. This device must not cause interfer- and ensure the future reliability and
stalled and used in accordance with the ence, economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
instruction manual, may cause harmful in- follow these recommendations may re-
terference to radio communications. Op- 2. This device must accept any interfer- sult in shortened engine life and re-
eration of this equipment in a residential ence, including interference that may duced engine performance.
area is likely to cause harmful interference cause undesired operation of the de-
vice. ∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-
in which case the user will be required to
stant speed, either fast or slow, and do
correct the interference at his own ex- L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi- not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
pense. tions suivantes:
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- 1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- gear.
mation: lage,
∙ Avoid quick starts.
This equipment complies with FCC radia- et
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- ∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-
trolled environment. This equipment 2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter sible.
should be installed and operated with tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible ∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
d’en compromettre le fonctionnne- (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
radiator and your body.
ment. other parts could be damaged.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.

Starting and driving 5-65

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more ∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle in providing fuel savings when driving
fuel economy from your vehicle. due to increased aerodynamic drag. on flat terrains.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin 6. Plan for the Shortest Route
Pedal Application when the A/C is on reduces cooling ∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
load. determine the best route to save
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- time.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
tances 7. Avoid Idling
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Observing the speed limit and not ∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
∙ Maintain constant speed while com-
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
muting and coast whenever pos-
legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- saves fuel and reduces emissions.
sible.
ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
2. Maintain Constant Speed drag. Roads
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance ∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
minimize stops. behind other vehicles reduces un- use special lanes to maintain cruis-
necessary braking. ing speed through the toll and avoid
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your num- ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate stopping and starting.
ber of stops. changes in speed permits reduced 9. Winter Warm Up
braking and smooth acceleration
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini- ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
changes.
mize red light stops and improve fuel to fuel economy.
efficiency. ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
conditions.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher 30 seconds of idling at start-up to
Vehicle Speeds 5. Use Cruise Control effectively circulate the engine oil be-
fore driving.
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more ∙ Using cruise control during highway
efficient to open windows to cool the driving helps maintain a steady
vehicle due to reduced engine load. speed.
5-66 Starting and driving
 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT 4X4 (I-4x4) (if so
equipped)

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper- ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. I–4X4 SYSTEM OPERATION
ating temperature more quickly
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
while driving versus idling. WARNING
maintenance.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool ∙ Do not drive beyond the performance
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking pressure. Low tire pressure increases capability of the tires. Accelerating
area or in the shade whenever pos- tire wear and lowers fuel economy. quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or
sible. sudden braking may cause loss of
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment. control, even with I-4x4 engaged.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening Improper alignment increases tire wear
the windows will help to reduce the and lowers fuel economy. ∙ For 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) equipped ve-
inside temperature faster, resulting in hicles, do not attempt to raise two
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine wheels off the ground and shift the
reduced demand on your A/C sys-
oil. For additional information, refer to transmission to any drive or reverse
tem.
“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- position with the engine running. Do-
tions” in the “Technical and consumer ing so may result in drivetrain dam-
information” section of this manual. age or unexpected vehicle movement
which could result in serious personal
injury or vehicle damage.

Starting and driving 5-67

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD ∙ If a 4WD warning message is dis-
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- played while driving there may be a
mometer (such as the dynamometers malfunction in the 4WD system. Re-
used by some states for emissions duce the vehicle speed immediately
testing) or similar equipment even if and have your vehicle checked. It is
the other two wheels are raised off the recommended that you visit a NISSAN
ground. Make sure that you inform dealer as soon as possible.
the test facility personnel that your
∙ If the 4WD high temperature message
vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it
is displayed while you are driving, pull
is placed on a dynamometer. Using
off the road in a safe area, and idle the
the wrong test equipment may result
engine. The driving mode will change
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
to 2WD to prevent the 4WD system
vehicle movement which could result
from malfunctioning. If the warning
in serious personal injury or vehicle
message turns off, you can drive LSD2496
damage.
again.
4WD shift switch
CAUTION ∙ If the incorrect tire size message is
displayed while you are driving, pull The 4WD system is used to select the 2WD,
∙ Do not operate the engine on a free off the road in a safe area with the AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the
roller when any of the wheels are engine idling. Check that all tire sizes driving conditions.
raised. are the same, that the tire pressure is Turn the 4WD mode switch, located on the
∙ If you use the free roller, rotate four correct and that the tires are not ex- center console, to select 2WD, AUTO, or
wheels with the same speed without cessively worn. LOCK.
raising any wheels. ∙ If a warning message continues to be ∙ 2WD – Turn the 4WD mode switch to the
displayed after the above operations, 2WD position. The 2WD indicator in the
have your vehicle checked as soon as vehicle information display illuminates.
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-68 Starting and driving

∙ AUTO – Turn the 4WD mode switch to 4WD mode Wheels driven 4WD mode indicator Use conditions
the neutral (AUTO) position. The 4WD
AUTO indicator in the vehicle informa- Front only – This
tion display illuminates. mode is used when For driving on dry
2WD 2WD
driving on a normal paved roads.
∙ LOCK – To engage the LOCK mode, turn road *1
the 4WD mode switch to the LOCK po-
Distribution of torque
sition. The switch will return to the AUTO
position automatically and the 4WD to the front and rear
LOCK indicator in the vehicle informa- wheels changes au-
tion display illuminates. To disengage tomatically depend-
For driving on paved
the LOCK mode, turn the switch to the AUTO ing on road condi- AUTO
or slippery roads.
LOCK position again. The switch will re- tions encountered.
turn to the AUTO position automatically, This results in im-
and the 4WD LOCK indicator turns into proved driving
the AUTO indicator. The LOCK mode will stability.
automatically be canceled when the ig- 4-Wheel Drive *2 *3 For driving on rough
nition switch is placed in the OFF posi- LOCK LOCK
roads.
tion.
*1 The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving
conditions.
*2 The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has
been driven at a high speed. The 4WD LOCK indicator turns into the AUTO indicator.
*3 The LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-69

4WD shift tips CAUTION 4WD mode indicators
∙ If the 4WD mode switch is operated ∙ Depending on the driving condition, The 2WD, 4WD AUTO and LOCK mode indi-
while making a turn, accelerating or de- the 4WD mode may automatically cators are located in the vehicle informa-
celerating, or if the ignition switch is change from 2WD to 4WD even when tion display.
placed in the OFF position while in the the 2WD mode is selected. If this oc- The 4WD mode indicators will display the
AUTO or LOCK mode, you may feel a jolt. curs while driving, the 4WD mode indi- mode selected by the 4WD mode switch
This is normal. cator will not illuminate. while the engine is running.
∙ The oil temperature of powertrain parts ∙ Do not start the engine with the 4WD The 4WD AUTO indicator illuminates when
will increase if the vehicle is continu- mode switch in any mode in the fol- selecting the AUTO mode.
ously operated under conditions where lowing cases:
the difference between the front and The 4WD LOCK indicator illuminates when
rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as – When the vehicle is placed on a fre-
selecting the LOCK mode and the 2WD in-
when driving the vehicle on rough roads eroller or jacking up the vehicle
dicator illuminates when selecting the 2WD
through sand or mud or when freeing a with the front tires raised and the
mode.
stuck vehicle. In these cases, the 4WD rear tires on the ground.
mode changes to the 2WD mode to – When towing the vehicle with the
protect the powertrain parts. rear tires raised from the ground.
∙ Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the ∙ Operate the 4WD mode switch only
same as 2WD. when driving straight. Do not operate
the 4WD mode switch when making a
turn or backing up.
∙ Do not operate the 4WD mode switch
with the front wheel spinning.
∙ Engine idling speed is high while
warming up the engine. Be especially
careful when starting or driving on
slippery surfaces with the 4WD mode
switch set in the AUTO mode.

5-70 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-
ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm
WSD0050 day can quickly become high enough
to cause a significant risk of injury or
WARNING ∙ Safe parking procedures require that death to people and pets.
both the parking brake be set and the
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-
flammable materials such as dry
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
move unexpectedly or roll away and sition.
ignite and cause a fire.
result in an accident. Make sure the
shift lever has been pushed as far for- 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
ward as it can go and cannot be into traffic when parked on an incline, it
moved without depressing the foot is a good practice to turn the wheels as
brake pedal. illustrated.
∙ Never leave the engine running while ∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊
A :
the vehicle is unattended.
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
Starting and driving 5-71
 POWER STEERING

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

B:
WARNING erations that could cause the power steer-
ing system to overheat.
Turn the wheels away from the curb ∙ If the engine is not running or is
and move the vehicle back until the turned off while driving, the power as- You may hear a sound when the steering
curb side wheel gently touches the sist for the steering will not work. wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
curb. Steering will be harder to operate. not a malfunction.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO ∙ When the power steering warning If the power steering warning light illumi-
CURB 䊊
C :
light illuminates with the engine run- nates while the engine is running, it may
ning, there will be no power assist for indicate the power steering system is not
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
the steering. You will still have control functioning properly and may need servic-
road so the vehicle will move away
of the vehicle, but the steering will be ing. Have the power steering system
from the center of the road if it moves.
harder to operate. Have the power checked. It is recommended that you visit a
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK steering system checked. It is recom- NISSAN dealer for this service.
position. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer When the power steering warning light illu-
for this service. minates with the engine running, there will
The power steering system is designed to be no power assist for the steering, but you
provide power assist while driving to oper- will still have control of the vehicle. At this
ate the steering wheel with light force. time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
When the steering wheel is operated re- sharp turns and at low speeds.
peatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power as- For additional information, refer to “Power
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. steering warning light” in the “Instruments
This is to prevent overheating of the power and controls” section of this manual.
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
5-72 Starting and driving
BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, in order to assure the best braking perfor-
you will still have braking at two wheels. ∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be mance.
careful when braking, accelerating or
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- This procedure is described in the vehicle
celerating could cause the wheels to service manual. It is recommended that
Vacuum assisted brakes skid and result in an accident. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The brake booster aids braking by using ∙ If the engine is not running or is ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you turned off while driving, the power as-
can stop the vehicle by depressing the sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- WARNING
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- ing will be harder.
sure on the brake pedal will be required to ∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will Wet brakes it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
be longer. When the vehicle is washed or driven techniques. It can help maintain ve-
Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As hicle control during braking on slip-
a result, your braking distance will be lon- pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal ger and the vehicle may pull to one side ping distances on slippery surfaces
while driving. This will overheat the brakes, during braking. will be longer than on normal sur-
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
gas mileage. tances may also be longer on rough,
speed while lightly pressing the brake
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until are using tire chains. Always maintain
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving a safe distance from the vehicle in
and downshift to a lower gear before going the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
down a slope or long grade. Overheated function correctly. responsible for safety.
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in ∙ Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
Starting and driving 5-73
 – When replacing tires, install the Anti-lock Braking System will operate to Normal operation
specified size of tires on all four prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
wheels. ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 -
– When installing a spare tire, make WARNING 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
sure that it is the proper size and road conditions.
type as specified on the Tire and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
Loading Information label. For ad- may result in increased stopping When the ABS senses that one or more
ditional information, refer to “Tire distances. wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
and Loading Information label” in rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
Self-test feature sure. This action is similar to pumping the
the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
– For additional information, refer to
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The from under the hood or feel a vibration
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature from the actuator when it is operating. This
yourself ” section of this manual.
that tests the system each time you start is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels the engine and move the vehicle at a low erating properly. However, the pulsation
do not lock during hard braking or when speed in forward or reverse. When the self- may indicate that road conditions are haz-
braking on slippery surfaces. The system test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise ardous and extra care is required while
detects the rotation speed at each wheel and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. driving.
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- This is normal and does not indicate a mal-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. function. If the computer senses a mal- BRAKE ASSIST
By preventing each wheel from locking, the function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the When the force applied to the brake pedal
system helps the driver maintain steering exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
control and helps to minimize swerving instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock activated generating greater braking force
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
assistance. than a conventional brake booster even
Using the system with light pedal force.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady hicle checked. It is recommended that you
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-74 Starting and driving
 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM

WARNING The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. indicator light in the instrument panel
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist Under certain driving conditions, the VDC flashes so note the following:
braking operation and is not a collision system helps to perform the following
warning or avoidance device. It is the functions: ∙ The road may be slippery or the system
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive may determine some action is required
safely and be in control of the vehicle at ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce to help keep the vehicle on the steered
all times. wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel path.
so power is transferred to a non-
slipping drive wheel on the same axle. ∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine under the hood. This is normal and indi-
output to reduce drive wheel slip based cates that the VDC system is working
on vehicle speed (traction control func- properly.
tion).
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual road conditions.
wheels and engine output to help the For additional information, refer to “Slip in-
driver maintain control of the vehicle in dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
the following conditions: (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol- ments and controls” section of this manual.
low the steered path despite in- If a malfunction occurs in the system,
creased steering input)
the and indicator lights come
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due on in the instrument panel. The VDC sys-
to certain road or driving conditions) tem automatically turns off when these in-
dicator lights are on.
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- VDC system. The indicator light and
ing situations. the AEB system warning light illuminate to
indicate the VDC system is off.
Starting and driving 5-75
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- ∙ When driving on extremely inclined
the system, the VDC system still operates sion. If suspension parts such as surfaces such as higher banked cor-
to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- ners, the VDC system may not operate
transferring power to a non-slipping drive bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are properly and the indicator light
wheel. The indicator light flashes if not NISSAN recommended for your
may flash or both the and
this occurs. All other VDC functions are off vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
indicator lights may illuminate. Do not
and the indicator light will not flash. the VDC system may not operate
drive on these types of roads.
The VDC system is automatically reset to properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and ∙ When driving on an unstable surface
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
the indicator light may flash or such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
OFF position then back to the ON position.
both the and indicator ramp, the indicator light may
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- lights may illuminate. flash or both the and indi-
ture that tests the system each time you cator lights may illuminate. This is not
start the engine and move the vehicle for- ∙ If brake related parts such as brake
a malfunction. Restart the engine af-
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When pads, rotors and calipers are not
ter driving onto a stable surface.
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk NISSAN recommended or are ex-
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake tremely deteriorated, the VDC system ∙ If wheels or tires other than the
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- may not operate properly and both NISSAN recommended ones are used,
tion of a malfunction. the and the indicator lights the VDC system may not operate
may illuminate. properly and the indicator light
WARNING may flash or both the and
∙ If engine control related parts are not
∙ The VDC system is designed to help NISSAN recommended or are ex- indicator lights may illuminate.
the driver maintain stability but does tremely deteriorated, both the ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
not prevent accidents due to abrupt winter tires or tire chains on a snow
and indicator lights may
steering operation at high speeds or covered road.
illuminate.
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.

5-76 Starting and driving

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- ∙ When driving on extremely inclined
The system gradually adjusts braking sion. If suspension parts such as surfaces such as higher banked cor-
power during normal braking to help pro- shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- ners, the VDC system may not operate
vide an enhanced brake feel. bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are properly and the indicator light
not NISSAN recommended for your
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION may flash or both the and
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
indicator lights may illuminate. Do not
During braking while driving through turns, the VDC system may not operate
drive on these types of roads.
the system optimizes the distribution of properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and ∙ When driving on an unstable surface
force to each of the four wheels depending such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
on the radius of the turn. the indicator light may flash or
both the and indicator ramp, the indicator light may
WARNING lights may illuminate. flash or both the and indi-
cator lights may illuminate. This is not
∙ The VDC system is designed to help ∙ If brake related parts such as brake
a malfunction. Restart the engine af-
the driver maintain stability but does pads, rotors and calipers are not
ter driving onto a stable surface.
not prevent accidents due to abrupt NISSAN recommended or are ex-
steering operation at high speeds or tremely deteriorated, the VDC system ∙ If wheels or tires other than the
by careless or dangerous driving may not operate properly and both NISSAN recommended ones are used,
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and the and the indicator lights the VDC system may not operate
be especially careful when driving and may illuminate. properly and the indicator light
cornering on slippery surfaces and al- may flash or both the and
ways drive carefully. ∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex- indicator lights may illuminate.
tremely deteriorated, both the ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
and indicator lights may winter tires or tire chains on a snow
illuminate. covered road.

Starting and driving 5-77

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
so equipped)

WARNING engine braking alone cannot control ve- WARNING

hicle speed. Hill descent control applies the
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed al- ∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
control system to control vehicle lowing the driver to concentrate on steer- system to prevent the vehicle from
speed when driving on steep downhill ing while reducing the burden of brake and moving backward on a hill. Always
grades. Always drive carefully and at- accelerator operation. drive carefully and attentively. De-
tentively when using the hill descent press the brake pedal when the ve-
control system and decelerate the ve- If the hill descent control light is blinking, hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-
hicle speed by depressing the brake the hill descent control is engaged; how- pecially careful when stopped on a hill
pedal if necessary. Be especially care- ever, the hill descent control will not control on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
ful when driving on frozen, muddy or the vehicle speed. prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
extremely steep downhill roads. Fail- ∙ Once the system is activated, the indi- wards may result in a loss of control of
ure to control vehicle speed may re- cator light will remain on in the instru- the vehicle and possible serious injury
sult in a loss of control of the vehicle ment panel. For additional information, or death.
and possible serious injury or death. refer to “Hill descent control system ON ∙ The hill start assist system is not de-
∙ The hill descent control may not con- indicator light” in the “Instruments and signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-
trol the vehicle speed on a hill under controls” section of this manual. still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
all load or road conditions. Always be If the accelerator or brake pedal is de- when the vehicle is stopped on a
prepared to depress the brake pedal pressed while the hill descent control sys- steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do tem is on, the system will stop operating the vehicle to roll backwards and may
so may result in a collision or serious temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or result in a collision or serious personal
personal injury. brake pedal is released, the hill descent injury.
control system begins to function again if ∙ The hill start assist may not prevent
The hill descent control system can only be the hill descent control operating condi-
activated when the 4WD LOCK mode is en- the vehicle from rolling backwards on
tions are fulfilled. a hill under all load or road conditions.
gaged.
For the best results, when descending Always be prepared to depress the
The hill descent control system helps steep downhill grades, the hill descent con- brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
maintain vehicle speed when driving under trol switch should be on and the shift lever from rolling backwards. Failure to do
15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill in L (Low gear) for engine braking. so may result in a collision or serious
grades. Hill descent control is useful when personal injury.

5-78 Starting and driving

 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)

The hill start assist system automatically

∙ The system is designed as an aid to
keeps the brakes applied to help prevent
the driver in detecting large station-
the vehicle from rolling backward in the
ary objects to help avoid damaging
time it takes the driver to release the brake
the vehicle. The system will not detect
pedal and apply the accelerator when the
small objects below the bumper, and
vehicle is stopped on a hill.
may not detect objects close to the
Hill start assist will operate automatically bumper or on the ground.
under the following conditions: ∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-
reverse gear. aligned or bent, the sensing zone may
be altered causing inaccurate mea-
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a surement of obstacles or false alarms.
hill by applying the brake.
The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. LSD0095
obstacles near the rear bumper when the
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and hill start assist will stop operating WARNING shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may
completely. not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph
∙ Always turn and look back before (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-
Hill start assist will not operate when the backing up. The RSS is not a substi-
lar or moving objects.
shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park) tute for proper backing procedures.
or on a flat and level road. ∙ Read and understand the limitations The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft
of the RSS as contained in this section. (1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a de-
Inclement weather may affect the creased coverage area at the outer cor-
function of the RSS; this may include ners of the bumper (refer to the illustration
reduced performance or a false for approximate zone coverage areas). As
activation. you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the obstacle is
∙ This system is not designed to pre- less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
vent contact with small or moving sound continuously. If the RSS detects a
objects. stationary or receding object further than
10 in. (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle,
Starting and driving 5-79
 COLD WEATHER DRIVING

the tone will sound for only 3 seconds. FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
Once the system detects an object ap-
proaching, the tone will sound again. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply If the vehicle is to be left outside without
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-
The RSS automatically turns on when the becomes frozen, heat the key before in- ing the engine block. Refill before operating
shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the serting it into the key hole, or use the the vehicle. For additional information, refer
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. NISSAN Intelligent Key®. to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-
The RSS can be turned off in the vehicle
ANTIFREEZE yourself” section of this manual.
information display. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis- TIRE EQUIPMENT
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
tion of this manual. To turn the RSS off, the
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
ignition switch must be placed in the ON provide superior performance on dry
ter protection. For additional information,
position. pavement. However, the performance
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-
it-yourself ” section of this manual. of these tires will be substantially re-
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear
bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and duced in snowy and icy conditions. If
large accumulations of dirt (do not clean BATTERY you operate your vehicle on snowy or
the sensors with sharp objects). If the sen- icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
If the battery is not fully charged during
sors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
extremely cold weather conditions, the
of the RSS. battery fluid may freeze and damage the on all four wheels. It is recommended
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
the battery should be checked regularly. type, size, speed rating and availability
For additional information, refer to “Battery” information.
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this 2. For additional traction on icy roads,
manual. studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian prov-
inces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before install-
ing studded tires.

5-80 Starting and driving

Skid and traction capabilities of studded DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE ∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
pery roads.
poorer than that of non-studded snow WARNING
tires. ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional very cold snow or ice can be slick and clear of the exhaust pipe and from
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the very hard to drive on. The vehicle will around your vehicle.
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. have much less traction or “grip” un-
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT der these conditions. Try to avoid driv- ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
ing on wet ice until the road is salted equipped)
It is recommended that the following items or sanded.
be carried in the vehicle during winter: Engine block heaters are used to assist
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with with cold temperature starting.
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- caution. Accelerate and slow down
move ice and snow from the windows with care. If accelerating or down- The engine block heater should be used
and wiper blades. shifting too fast, the drive wheels will when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
lose even more traction. or lower.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support. ∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be WARNING
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- started sooner than on dry pavement. ∙ Do not use your engine block heater
drifts.
∙ Allow greater following distances on with an ungrounded electrical system
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the slippery roads. or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
windshield-washer fluid reservoir. seriously injured by an electrical
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). shock if you use an ungrounded
These may appear on an otherwise connection.
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before ∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-
reaching it. Try not to brake while on gine block heater cord before starting
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering the engine. Damage to the cord could
maneuvers. result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.

Starting and driving 5-81

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
extension cord rated for at least 10 A. properly store the cord to keep it away
Plug the extension cord into a Ground from moving parts.
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-
sion cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, de-
pending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.

5-82 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle recovery
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

WARNING To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure ing procedure:
to move the vehicle well off the road.
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash- switch three consecutive times in less
ers while moving on the highway un- than 1.5 seconds, or
less unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle – Push and hold the push-button ignition
might become a hazard to other switch for more than 2 seconds.
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
LIC0394 switch placed in any position.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
when you must stop or park under emer-
of the hazard warning flasher switch
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
while driving.

6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING you have a flat tire, replace it with a
SYSTEM (TPMS) ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
spare tire as soon as possible, If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly in-
This vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure electric medical equipment. Those
flated, have the vehicle checked. It is
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire who use a pacemaker should contact
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the electric medical equipment
dealer for this service.
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and manufacturer for the possible influ-
the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning ences before use. ∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
appears in the vehicle information display, such as the spare tire, the TPMS will
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
one or more of your tires is significantly not function and the low tire pressure
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
warning light will flash for approxi-
under-inflated. If equipped, the system also den steering maneuvers or abrupt
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
displays pressure of all tires (except the braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-
spare tire) on the display screen by sending the road to a safe location and stop
placed and/or TPMS system reset as
a signal from a sensor that is installed in the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
soon as possible. It is recommended
each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven ing with under-inflated tires may per-
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti- manently damage the tires and in-
these services.
vate and warn you of it by the low tire pres- crease the likelihood of tire failure.
sure warning light. This system will activate Serious vehicle damage could occur ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
and may lead to an accident and could nally specified by NISSAN could affect
only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
result in serious personal injury. the proper operation of the TPMS.
above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional in-
Check the tire pressure for all four
formation, refer to “Warning lights, indicator ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
lights and audible reminders” in “Instru- tire sealant into the tires, as this may
recommended COLD tire pressure
ments and controls” section and the “Tire cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the sure sensors.
mation label to turn the low tire pres-
“Starting and driving” sections of this sure warning light OFF. If the light still
manual. illuminates while driving after adjust-
ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE WARNING
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions ∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-
below: curely applied and the Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted
Stopping the vehicle into P (Park).
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
away from traffic. on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. hazardous.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-
(Park). fessional road assistance.
4. Turn off the engine.
LCE2142
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assis- A. Blocks
tance personnel that you need assis- B. Flat tire
tance.
Blocking wheels
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
hicle and stand in a safe place, away Place suitable blocks at both the front and
from traffic and clear of the vehicle. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

 LCE2407 LCE2036 LCE2340
Getting the spare tire and tools 2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by It should not be necessary to remove or
lifting up using the handles. dislocate the Bose® subwoofer (if so
1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage equipped) 䊊 A when removing the jack and
board in the cargo area using the tool kit cover 䊊
B.
handle.

In case of emergency 6-5

 LCE2348 LCE2350 LCE2351
3. Remove the tool kit 䊊
C by releasing the 4. Remove the jack. 6. Attach the spare tire winch socket 䊊
I
Velcro straps 䊊
D.
∙ The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊E . to the lowering mechanism nut.
To release the fastener, assemble the 7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel
jacking rod 䊊 F into the wheel nut nut wrench 䊊 G into the jacking rod 䊊 F
wrench 䊊 G and rotate counterclock-
and insert the T-shaped end of the jack-
wise to release. ing rod into the winch socket 䊊 I and
∙ Insert the flat end of the wheel nut rotate counterclockwise.
wrench 䊊 G into the slot of the fas-
8. Once the spare tire is lowered, release it
tener 䊊 E , and rotate counterclock-
from the vehicle by guiding the lower-
wise to release the jack.
ing cable and winch through the cen-
5. The lowering mechanism for the spare ter of the tire.
tire is located on the passenger side of
the cargo area. Remove the cover 䊊 H to
access the lowering mechanism.

6-6 In case of emergency

NOTE: Jacking up vehicle and removing ∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
Fully lower the spare tire below the ve- the damaged tire off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle before attempting to remove the hicle to move.
winch from the spare tire. WARNING Always refer to the illustration for the cor-
9. After removing the spare tire from un- ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is rect placement and jack-up points for your
der the vehicle, be sure to crank the supported only by the jack. If it is nec- specific vehicle model and jack type.
cable up by rotating the winch socket essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
Carefully read the caution label attached
clockwise to stow it. port it with safety stands.
to the jack body and the following in-
∙ Use only the jack provided with your structions.
CAUTION vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
∙ Make sure safety cable is coiled above
other vehicles. The jack is designed
spare tire when reinstalling spare
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire/wheel.
tire change.
∙ When re-installing the spare tire un-
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
der the vehicle after use, be sure to
use any other part of the vehicle for
secure it with the tire stem facing
jack support.
down toward the ground. If the spare
tire is improperly secured with the tire ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
stem facing up towards the bottom of necessary.
the vehicle, there is an increased risk
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
of separating from the vehicle in the
event of a crash which may pose a ∙ Do not start or run the engine while
hazard in traffic or risk of injury to vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
others. vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.

In case of emergency 6-7

 The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

LDI3310
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two 2. Place the jack directly under the
turns by turning counterclockwise with jack-up point as illustrated so the top
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the jack-up point. The jack-up points are
ground. indicated by the notches under the
frame.

6-8 In case of emergency

 LCE2043 WCE0056
NOTE: Installing the spare tire
If the lug nut wrench/jack handle con- The spare tire is designed for emergency
tacts the ground while raising the ve- use. For additional information, refer to
hicle, disassemble the lug nut wrench “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
from the jack extension rod, rotate it 90
section of this manual.
degrees and reassemble.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-
LCE0087 move the tire. between the wheel and hub.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
jack as shown. tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (䊊A ,䊊
B,䊊C ,䊊D,䊊
until the tire clears the ground. E )
until they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-9
 JUMP STARTING

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to To start your engine with a booster battery,
touches the ground. Then, with the specification at all times. It is recom- the instructions and precautions below
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel mended that wheel nuts be tightened to must be followed.
nuts securely in the sequence illus- specifications at each lubrication interval.
A ,䊊
trated (䊊 B ,䊊
C ,䊊D ,䊊
E ). Lower the ve- WARNING
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-
hicle completely.
sure. ∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
WARNING COLD pressure: After vehicle has been lead to a battery explosion, resulting
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less in severe injury or death. It could also
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly damage your vehicle.
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off. ∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
This could cause an accident. present in the vicinity of the battery.
Tire and Loading Information label af-
Keep all sparks and flames away from
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel fixed to the driver side center pillar.
the battery.
studs or nuts. This could cause the 5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and
nuts to become loose. ∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
jacking equipment in the vehicle.
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the 6. Close the liftgate. painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
vehicle has been driven for 621 miles corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, WARNING can cause severe burns. If the fluid
etc.). should come into contact with any-
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire thing, immediately flush the con-
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel and jacking equipment are properly
nuts to the specified torque with a tacted area with water.
secured after use. Such items can be-
torque wrench. come dangerous projectiles in an ac- ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
cident or sudden stop. children.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer- ∙ The booster battery must be rated at
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
gency use. For additional information, 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do- battery can damage your vehicle.
it-yourself ” section of this manual.

6-10 In case of emergency

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye protec-
tors (for example, goggles or indus-
trial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jew-
elry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it. LCE2223

WARNING 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-
Always follow the instructions below. sary electrical systems (lights, heater,
Failure to do so could result in damage air conditioner, etc.).
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury. 3. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (䊊
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ).
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
hicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.

In case of emergency 6-11

 PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION CAUTION WARNING

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi- ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body (CVT) models cannot be push-started overheats. Doing so could cause en-
ground (for example, strut mounting or tow-started. Attempting to do so gine damage or a vehicle fire.
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to may cause transmission damage.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
the battery.
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The never remove the radiator or coolant
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not three-way catalyst may be damaged. reservoir cap while the engine is still
touch moving parts in the engine hot. When the radiator or coolant res-
compartment and that the cable ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
clamps do not contact any other water will spurt out, possibly causing
metal. serious injury.
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-
and let it run for a few minutes. ing out.
5. Keep the engine speed of the booster If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start an extremely high temperature gauge
the engine of the vehicle being jump reading and the Low Oil Pressure: See
started. Owner’s Manual warning message ap-
pears in the vehicle information display), or
CAUTION if you feel a lack of engine power, detect
abnormal noise, etc. take the following
Do not keep the starter motor engaged steps:
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ig- 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
nition switch in the OFF position and ply the parking brake and move the
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. shift lever to P (Park).
6. After starting the engine, carefully dis- Do not stop the engine.
connect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.

6-12 In case of emergency

 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the WARNING When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
windows, move the heater or air condi- and local regulations for towing must be
tioner temperature control to maxi- Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, followed. Incorrect towing equipment
mum hot and fan control to high jewelry or clothing to come into contact could damage your vehicle. Towing in-
speed. with, or get caught in, engine belts or structions are available from a NISSAN
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- dealer. Local service operators are gener-
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen ing fan can start at any time. ally familiar with the applicable laws and
for steam or coolant escaping from the procedures for towing. To assure proper
radiator before opening the hood. If 6. After the engine cools down, check the
towing and to prevent accidental damage
coolant level in the engine coolant res-
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-
ervoir tank with the engine running.
the engine. Do not open the hood fur- ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
Add coolant to the engine coolant res-
ther until no steam or coolant can be advisable to have the service operator
ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-
seen. carefully read the following precautions:
hicle repaired. It is recommended that
4. Open the engine hood. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice. WARNING
WARNING ∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting ∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
burned. has been lifted by a tow truck.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage CAUTION

or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and ∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
radiator should not leak water. If cool-
and powertrain are in working condi-
ant is leaking, the water pump belt is
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
missing or loose, or the cooling fan dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
does not run, stop the engine. used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-13

For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat
towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
tional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.

LCE2237

6-14 In case of emergency

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models
with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with a
CVT with any of the wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case
and transmission due to the lack of
LCE2041
lubrication.
Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION
Continuously Variable ∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
Transmission (CVT) wheels on the ground or four wheels
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be on the ground (forward or backward),
as this may cause serious and expen-
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
sive damage to the transmission. If it
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
is necessary to tow the vehicle with
truck as illustrated. the rear wheels raised always use
towing dollies under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on tow-
ing dollies:

In case of emergency 6-15

 – Place the ignition switch in the OFF If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
position, and secure the steering etc., use the following procedure:
for vehicle recovery and follow the
wheel in a straight-ahead position manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
with a rope or similar device. Never (VDC) system.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
secure the steering wheel by plac-
straight out from the front of the ve- 2. Make sure the area in front and behind
ing the ignition switch in the LOCK
hicle. Never pull at an angle. the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for ∙ Route recovery devices so they do not 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
models with a steering lock touch any part of the vehicle except clear an area around the front tires.
mechanism). the attachment point.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, backward.
etc., use a tow strap or other device de-
stuck vehicle) signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- ∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- verse) and D (Drive).
WARNING tions for the recovery device. ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- sible to maintain the rocking motion.
sonal injury or death when recovering a
Rocking a stuck vehicle
stuck vehicle: ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
WARNING shifting between R (Reverse) and D
∙ Contact a professional towing service (Drive).
to recover the vehicle if you have any ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
questions regarding the recovery ∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
procedure. (55 km/h).
This could cause them to explode and
∙ Tow chains or cables must be at- result in serious injury. Parts of your 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
tached only to main structural mem- vehicle could also overheat and be few tries, contact a professional towing
bers of the vehicle. damaged. service to remove the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Cleaning the seat tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

your vehicle, it is important to take proper
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
care of it.
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- must be taken when removing
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
vehicle as soon as you can: stances so the paint surface is not
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
scratched or damaged.
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
age from acid rain. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
CAUTION clean water.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in Inside edges, seams and folds on the
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird the detergent. Some car washes, es-
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or doors, hatches and hood are particularly
pecially brushless ones, use some vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
bugs get on the paint surface. acid for cleaning. The acid may react fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur- with some plastic vehicle compo- Take care that the drain holes in the lower
face. nents, causing them to crack. This
edge of the door are open. Spray water
could affect their appearance, and
Whenever possible, store or park your ve- under the body and in the wheel wells to
also could cause them not to function
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. properly. Always check with your car loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in wash to confirm that acid is not used. A damp chamois can be used to dry the
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong vehicle to avoid water spots.
body cover. household soap, strong chemical de- WAXING
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- tergents, gasoline or solvents.
face when putting on or removing the ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- Regular waxing protects the paint surface
body cover. light or while the vehicle body is hot, and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
as the surface may become Polishing is recommended to remove
water-spotted. built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care

 ∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough GLASS CAUTION
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and Follow the directions below to avoid
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra- mal for glass to become coated with a film
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
that may damage the vehicle finish. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily acid or alkali contents to clean the
remove this film. wheels.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- CAUTION wheels when they are hot. The wheel
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. temperature should be the same as
When cleaning the inside of the win-
REMOVING SPOTS dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, ambient temperature.
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- the cleaner within 15 minutes after
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible age the electrical conductors, radio an- the cleaner is applied.
from the surface of the paint to avoid last- tenna elements or rear window de-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning froster elements. CHROME PARTS
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
recommended that you visit a NISSAN non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge the finish.
dealer for these products. dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
UNDERBODY cially during winter months in areas where TIRE DRESSINGS
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it can discolor the wheels. NISSAN does not recommend the use of
is necessary to clean the underbody regu- tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
building up and causing the acceleration of ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
corrosion on the underbody and suspen- plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
sion. Before the winter period and again in ing and form a compound. This compound
the spring, the underseal must be checked may come off the tire while driving and
and, if necessary, re-treated. stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
 CLEANING INTERIOR

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION
following precautions: interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The similar material.
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a and damaging to leather surfaces
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help dry, soft cloth. and should be removed promptly. Do
prevent it from entering the tire not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-
Regular care and cleaning is required in
tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
order to maintain the appearance of the
cult to remove). detergents or ammonia-based clean-
leather (if so equipped).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry ers as they may damage the leather’s
Before using any fabric protector, read the natural finish.
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
completely removed from the tire ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
tread/grooves. recommended by the manufacturer.
may stain or bleach the seat material.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
mended by the tire dressing manufac- meter or gauge lens covers. It may
clean the meter and gauge lens.
turer. damage the lens cover.
WARNING AIR FRESHENERS
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can Most air fresheners use a solvent that
damage the seat or occupant classifi- could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
cation sensor. This can also affect the an air freshener, take the following precau-
operation of the air bag system and re- tions:
sult in serious personal injury. ∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that al-
lows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
7-4 Appearance and care
 ∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
∙ Clean water based stains by patting
on the vents. These products can cause the surface with a clean soft cloth
immediate damage and discoloration dampened in warm water. Press a
when spilled on interior surfaces. clean dry cloth onto the surface to re-
Carefully read and follow the manufactur- move as much dampness as possible
er’s instructions before using the air fresh- and then let air dry.
eners. ∙ Clean oil based stains by patting the
surface with a clean soft cloth damp-
POWER MOONROOF (if so ened in warm water. Press a clean dry
equipped) cloth onto the surface to remove as
much dampness as possible and then
The sunshade is made from a tricot material.
let air dry.
CAUTION
LAI2002
To help prevent damaging the moon-
roof while cleaning: FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
∙ Do not rub the material with a cloth. WARNING
Doing so can damage the surface of
the material or cause a stain to To avoid potential pedal interference
spread. that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar chemical to clean the sun- ∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
shade. This may discolor the moon- other floor mat in the driver front po-
roof and damage the surface. sition or install them upside down or
backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, Floor mat installation 3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
or equivalent floor mats, that are spe- fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- tion still in the OFF position, the shift
cifically designed for use in your ve- sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of
hicle model and model year. lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-
the floor mat positioning hooks for each ously Variable Transmission models)
∙ Properly position the mats in the seating position varies depending on the and with the parking brake applied, fully
floorwell using the floor mat position- vehicle. apply and release all pedals. The floor
ing hook. For additional information, When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, mat must not interfere with pedal op-
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this follow the installation instructions provided eration or prevent the pedal from re-
section. with the mat and the following: turning to its normal position.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in- 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
terfere with pedal operation. shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu- dealer for details about installing the floor
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to ously Variable Transmission models) mats in your vehicle.
make sure they are properly installed. and with the parking brake fully applied,
position the floor mat in the floorwell so
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
that the floor mat grommet holes are
check the floor mats to make sure
aligned with the hook(s).
they are properly installed.
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and properly positioned.
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.

7-6 Appearance and care

 CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or CORROSION
chemical solvents to clean the seat Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing. ∙ The accumulation of moisture-
retaining dirt and debris in body panel
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
CAUTION coatings caused by gravel and stone
Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre- chips or minor traffic collisions.
vent reduction of ability to move the
seats. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
LAI2003 INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
Clean periodically with a high-powered
Positioning hooks
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may re-
CORROSION
The illustration shows the location of the duce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet
floor mat positioning hooks.
Moisture
cleansing agent may be used if necessary.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
SEAT BELTS the vehicle body underside can accelerate
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
them with a sponge dampened in a mild completely inside the vehicle and should
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
pletely in the shade before using them. For corrosion.
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of water as soon as possible.
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above CAUTION
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
exists and road salt is used.
bris from the passenger compart-
Temperature ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
High temperatures accelerate the rate of broom.
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated. ∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
Air pollution ponents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
use accelerates the corrosion process. are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- corrosion and deterioration of underbody
tion of paint surfaces. components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM and fenders.
CORROSION In winter, the underbody must be
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to cleaned periodically.
keep the vehicle clean. For additional protection against rust and
∙ Always check for minor damage to the corrosion, which may be required in some
paint and repair it as soon as possible. areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumula-
tion.
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main-

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
tenance work on your vehicle, always take matic engine cooling fan. It may come coolant. Improperly disposed engine
care to prevent serious accidental injury to on at any time without warning, even oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- if the ignition switch is in the OFF po- fluids can damage the environment. Al-
lowing are general precautions which sition and the engine is not running. ways conform to local regulations for
should be closely observed. To avoid injury, always disconnect the disposal of vehicle fluid.
negative battery cable before work- ∙ Never leave the engine or Continuously
WARNING ing near the fan. Variable Transmission (CVT) related
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ∙ If you must run the engine in an en- component harnesses disconnected
ply the parking brake securely and closed space such as a garage, be sure while the ignition switch is in the ON
block the wheels to prevent the ve- there is proper ventilation for exhaust position.
hicle from moving. Move the shift le- gases to escape. ∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-
ver to P (Park). ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is tery or any transistorized component
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the supported only by a jack. If it is neces- while the ignition switch is in the ON
OFF or LOCK position when perform- sary to work under the vehicle, sup- position.
ing any parts replacement or repairs. port it with safety stands.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and tions regarding only those items which are
∙ If you must work with the engine run-
sparks away from the fuel tank and
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair relatively easy for an owner to perform.
battery.
and tools away from moving fans, A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
belts and any other moving parts. ∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-
gine models are under high pressure available. For additional information, refer
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any even when the engine is off, it is recom- to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
loose clothing and remove any jew- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer information” in the “Technical and con-
elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines. sumer information” section of this manual.
fore working on your vehicle. You should be aware that incomplete or
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever CAUTION improper servicing may result in operating
you work on your vehicle. difficulties or excessive emissions, and
∙ Do not work under the hood while the could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and about any servicing, it is recommended
wait until it cools down. that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

VQ35DD engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Drive belt location
4. Fuse box
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Fuse box
9. Fuse/Fusible link box
10. Battery
11. Engine oil dipstick
12. Radiator cap
13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3291

Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Genuine NISSAN Long Life ∙ Never use any cooling system addi-
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to tives such as radiator sealer. Additives
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant may clog the cooling system and
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
protection. The antifreeze solution con- cause damage to the engine, trans-
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- mission and/or cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
tional engine cooling system additives are ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the
not necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. For additional information, refer
WARNING equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life to the "Maintenance and schedules"
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- section of this manual.
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
reservoir cap when the engine is hot. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
Wait until the engine and radiator cool freeze protection is needed due to
down. Serious burns could be caused weather where you operate your ve-
by high pressure fluid escaping from hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
the radiator. For additional informa- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
tion on precautions, refer to “If your trate following the directions on the
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of container. If an equivalent coolant
emergency” section of this manual. other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
gine damage, use only a Genuine structions to maintain minimum anti-
NISSAN radiator cap. freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.

8-4 Do-it-yourself
 This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long WARNING
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing never change the coolant when the
any other type of coolant or the use of engine is hot.
non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- ∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad- coolant reservoir cap when the en-
ditional information, refer to the "Mainte- gine is hot. Serious burns could be
nance and schedules" section of this caused by high pressure fluid escap-
manual. ing from the radiator.
If the cooling system frequently requires ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant, have it checked. It is recom- coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
LDI2860 for this service. as soon as possible.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
For additional information on the location
dren and pets.
LEVEL of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-
gine compartment check locations” in this Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
section. erly. Check your local regulations.
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊 B , add coolant CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
to the MAX level 䊊A . If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi- coolant. The service procedure can be
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX Improper servicing can result in reduced
level 䊊A . heater performance and engine over-
heating.

Do-it-yourself 8-5
ENGINE OIL

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en-
gine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
FILTER
For additional information on engine oil
and oil filter change, refer to the instruc-
tions outlined in this section.
LDI3014 WDI0214 Vehicle set-up
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
the oil level. It should be between the H apply the parking brake.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and (High) and L (Low) marks 䊊 B . This is the
apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-
normal operating oil level range. If the
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊 A , ing temperature.
reaches operating temperature. remove the oil filler cap and pour rec- 3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 min-
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than ommended oil through the opening. utes.
10 minutes for the oil to drain back Do not fill oil level above H (High)
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
into the oil pan. mark 䊊 C .
suitable floor jack and safety jack
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. 6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick. stands.
Reinsert it all the way. It is normal to add some oil between oil ∙ Place the safety jack stands under the
maintenance intervals or during the vehicle jack-up points.
break-in period, depending on the sever- ∙ A suitable adapter should be attached
ity of operating conditions. to the jack stand saddle.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
 CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.

LDI3357 LDI3354
䊊 Oil filler cap
1 䊊 Oil drain plug
2

Do-it-yourself 8-7
 LDI3350 LDI3355 LDI3356
䊊 Oil filter
3 䊊Right engine protector
4
Removal of engine protectors
1. Remove pins 䊊
A and right engine pro-
tector.
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench
by turning it counterclockwise and
completely drain the oil.

8-8 Do-it-yourself
 CAUTION ∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place erence only. Always use the dipstick to de-
to prevent oil spillage from the dip- termine the proper amount of oil in the
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine.
stick hole when filling the engine with
engine oil is hot.
oil. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
WARNING 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with Correct as required. Turn the engine off
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with clean engine oil. and wait more than 15 minutes. Check
used engine oil may cause skin 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a the oil level with the dipstick. Add en-
cancer. slight resistance is felt, then tighten ad- gine oil if necessary.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with ditionally more than 2/3 turn. After the operation
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash Oil filter tightening torque:
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner 1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse
15 to 21 N·m (11 to 15 ft-lb) order of removal.
as soon as possible.
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of a new washer. Securely tighten the
children. ground.
drain plug with a wrench. Do not use
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter excessive force. 3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re-
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. minder. For additional information, re-
Drain plug tightening torque: fer to “Vehicle information display” in
Remove the oil filter by turning it by 29 to 39 N·m (22 to 29 ft-lb) the “Instruments and controls” section
hand.
9. Refill the engine with the recom- of this manual.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- mended oil through the oil filler open- ∙ Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
face with a clean rag. ing, and install the oil filler cap securely.
∙ Check your local regulations.
For additional information about drain and
CAUTION refill capacity, refer to “Recommended
Be sure to remove any old gasket mate- fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
rial remaining on the sealing surface of “Technical and consumer information” sec-
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to tion of this manual. The drain and refill ca-
an oil leak and engine damage. pacity depends on the oil temperature and
drain time. Use these specifications for ref-
Do-it-yourself 8-9
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

CAUTION WARNING
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine Power steering fluid is poisonous and
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) should be stored carefully in marked
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with containers out of the reach of children.
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission CAUTION
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission ∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the ∙ Use of a power steering fluid other
use of fluids other than as recom- than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or
mended is not covered under equivalent will prevent the power
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited steering system from operating
Warranty. properly.
LDI2861
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
also damage the CVT. Damage caused The fluid level should be checked when the
by the use of fluids other than as rec- fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to
ommended is not covered under 86ºF (0 to 30ºC). The fluid level can be
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited checked with the level gauge which is at-
Warranty.
tached to the cap. To check the fluid level,
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid remove the cap. The fluid level should be
is required, it is recommended that you visit between the MAX 䊊 A and MIN 䊊
B lines.
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊B line, add
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Re-
move the cap and fill through the opening.

8-10 Do-it-yourself
BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊 B , the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊A . For addi-
tional information on brake fluid type, refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
LDI2147 LDI2583
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
WARNING the brake system should be thoroughly WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con- checked. It is recommended that you visit a RESERVOIR
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated NISSAN dealer for this service.
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
fluid may damage the brake system. periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
The use of improper fluids can dam- when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning ap-
age the brake system and affect the pears in the vehicle information display.
vehicle’s stopping ability.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
be stored carefully in marked contain- opening.
ers out of reach of children.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

Do-it-yourself 8-11
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
manufacturer’s instructions for the mix- with water to the manufacturer’s rec-
ture ratio. ommended levels before pouring the
Refill the reservoir more frequently when fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
driving conditions require an increased reservoir. Do not use the windshield-
amount of windshield-washer fluid. washer fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

8-12 Do-it-yourself
BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING
No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the
䊊
1
Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or
䊊
2 Shield eyes
battery acid.

䊊
3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
䊊
4 Battery acid eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-
tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

䊊
5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or
䊊
6 Explosive gas
injury.

∙ If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery’s performance.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

Do-it-yourself 8-13
NOTE: WARNING
Care should be taken to avoid situations ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
that can lead to potential battery dis- an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
charge and potential no-start conditions drogen gas generated by the battery
such as: is explosive. Explosive gases can
1. Installation or extended use of elec- cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
tronic accessories that consume bat-
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
tery power when the engine is not
furic acid can cause blindness or in-
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD jury. After touching a battery or bat-
players, etc.) tery cap, do not touch or rub your
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
only driven short distances. the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
In these cases, the battery may need to clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302
ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
be charged to maintain battery health. NOTE:
medical attention.
∙ When working on or near a battery, Do not try to open the top of the battery.
always wear suitable eye protection This battery is not equipped with remov-
and remove all jewelry. able vent caps.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related JUMP STARTING
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
handling. starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion of this manual. If the engine does not
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of start by jump starting, the battery may
children. have to be replaced. It is recommended
∙ Do not tip the battery. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.

8-14 Do-it-yourself
DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule found
in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

LDI2131 SDI1895
VQ35DD engine REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pul- Iridium-tipped spark plugs
ley It is not necessary to replace iridium-
3. Generator pulley tipped 䊊A spark plugs as frequently as con-
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley ventional type spark plugs because they
WARNING last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in ules" section of this manual. Do not service
the OFF or LOCK position before servic-
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
ing drive belt. The engine could rotate
regapping.
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- ∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If ommended or equivalent ones.
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
Do-it-yourself 8-15
 AIR CLEANER

WARNING ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
are off and that the parking brake is
could result in serious injury.
engaged securely.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
CAUTION push the tabs 䊊
A and pull the cover up-
Be sure to use the correct socket to re- ward.
move the spark plugs. An incorrect The viscous paper type filter element
socket can damage the spark plugs. should not be cleaned and reused. Replace
If replacement is required, it is recom- the air filter according to the maintenance
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
this service. ules" section of this manual.
LDI3015 When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
WARNING of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or oth- NOTE:
ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter
not only cleans the intake air, it also After installing a new air cleaner, make
stops the flame if the engine back- sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
fires. If the air cleaner is not installed housing and latch the clips 䊊 A .
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Never drive with the air IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
cleaner filter off. Be cautious working The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
on the engine when the air cleaner is of airborne dust and pollen particles and
off. reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, refer to the

8-16 Do-it-yourself
 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

"Maintenance and schedules" section of CLEANING

this manual for change intervals.
If your windshield is not clear after using
If replacement is required, it is recom- the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for chatters when running, wax or other mate-
this service. rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-
tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
LDI2757
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades. REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
CAUTION
To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-
Worn windshield wiper blades can
low the procedure below:
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.
2. Push the release tab 䊊
B.

3. Move the wiper blade 䊊

A down and re-
move.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
 CAUTION Rear window wiper blade
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return If checking or replacement is required, it is
the wiper arm to its original position; recommended that you visit a NISSAN
otherwise it may be damaged when dealer for this service.
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2710
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
䊊D . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin 䊊 C .

8-18 Do-it-yourself
BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly have Under some driving or climate conditions,
the brakes checked. It is recommended occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- noise may be heard. Occasional brake
vice. noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
Self-adjusting brakes performance of the brake system.
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting Proper brake inspection intervals should
brakes. be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
The front and rear disc-type brakes self- propriate maintenance schedule informa-
adjust every time the brake pedal is ap- tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
plied. section of this manual.

WARNING
LDI2385
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to If any electrical equipment does not oper-
normal. It is recommended that you ate, check for an open fuse.
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Fuses are used in the passenger and en-
gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-
Brake pad wear indicators vided and can be found in the passenger
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have compartment fuse box.
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
requires replacement, a high pitched installed in the fuse box securely.
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-19
 LDI3117 LDI0456
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing 5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A , replace it with a
the tab and lifting the cover up. new fuse 䊊 B.
WARNING 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- The fuse puller is located in the fuse trical system checked and repaired. It is
perage rating than that specified on the block in the passenger compartment. recommended that you visit a NISSAN
fuse box cover. This could damage the dealer for this service.
electrical system or electronic control Fusible links
units or cause a fire.
If the electrical equipment does not oper-
If any electrical equipment does not come ate and fuses are in good condition, check
on, check for an open fuse. the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the are melted, replace with only Genuine
headlight switch are OFF. NISSAN parts.

2. Open the engine hood.

8-20 Do-it-yourself
 If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

LDI3235 LDI0456
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 4. If the fuse is open 䊊
A , replace it with an
equivalent good fuse 䊊 B.
WARNING 5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall the box
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- cover.
perage rating than that specified on the 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
fuse box cover. This could damage the trical system checked and repaired. It is
electrical system or electronic control recommended that you visit a NISSAN
units or cause a fire. dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-21
BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Be careful not to allow children to swal- Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
low the battery or removed parts. follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊 A
into the slit 䊊
B of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

8-22 Do-it-yourself
 3. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice:
Recommended battery: CR2032 or For USA:
equivalent. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
electric terminals as doing so could
may not cause harmful interference, and
cause a malfunction.
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold- ence received, including interference
ing the battery across the contact that may cause undesired operation.
points will seriously deplete the stor-
Note:
age capacity.
Changes or modifications not expressly
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
approved by the party responsible for
bottom of the lower part.
compliance could void the user’s author-
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with ity to operate the equipment.
䊊
C and 䊊 D.
For Canada:
5. Operate the buttons to check the op- This device complies with Industry
eration. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
If you need assistance with replacement, it conditions: (1) this device may not cause
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN interference, and (2) this device must ac-
dealer for this service. cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-23
LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS ∙ Only touch the base when handling FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on headlight the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- For additional information on fog light bulb
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions lope. Touching the glass could signifi- replacement, refer to the instructions out-
outlined in this section. cantly affect bulb life and/or head- lined in this section.
light performance.
Replacing the halogen headlight ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
Replacing the fog light bulb
bulb (if so equipped) inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-
break if the glass envelope is mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
If bulb replacement is required, it is recom- scratched or the bulb is dropped. this service.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. ∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart. CAUTION
CAUTION Fog may temporarily form inside the ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
lenses of the exterior lights in the rain or in inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac- break if the glass envelope is
ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment a car wash. A temperature difference be-
tween the inside and the outside of the scratched or the bulb is dropped.
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunc- ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
service. tion. If large drops of water collect inside the glass envelope.
the lens, it is recommended that you visit a
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly ∙ Use the same number and wattage as
NISSAN dealer for servicing.
open without a bulb installed for a originally installed as shown in the
long period of time. Dust, moisture, Replacing the LED headlight bulb chart.
smoke, etc. entering the headlight (if so equipped) ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
body may affect bulb performance. light for a long period of time as dust,
Remove the bulb from the headlight If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-
quired, it is recommended that you visit a moisture and smoke may enter the
assembly just before a replacement fog light body and affect the perfor-
bulb is installed. NISSAN dealer for this service.
mance of the fog light.

8-24 Do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
High 65 H9
Low 55 H11
Park/ Daytime running — —
Turn 28/8 7444NA
Side marker 5 W5W
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
High 65 H9
Low — —
Park/ Daytime running — —
Turn 28/8 7444NA
Side marker 5 W5W
Front fog lights (if so equipped) 55 H11
Door mirror turn signal* — —
Map light* — —
Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158
Personal lights* 8 —
Glove box light* — —
Step light (if so equipped)* 5 168
Courtesy light* — —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 1.8 —
Cargo light* 8 —
High-mounted stop light* — —
Rear combination light*
Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W
Turn 21 WY21W
Side marker 5 W5W
Backup (reversing)* 16 W16W
License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-
tion.

Do-it-yourself 8-25
 1. Headlight assembly
2 Map light
3. Door mirror turn signal
4. Step light (if so equipped)
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. Personal light
7. Cargo light
8. High-mounted stop light
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light

LDI3106 WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
8-26 Do-it-yourself
WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in tire) on the display screen by send- “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
the “In case of emergency” section of ing a signal from a sensor that is and Loading Information label is af-
this manual. installed in each wheel. fixed to the driver side center pillar.
TIRE PRESSURE Tire pressures should be checked
The TPMS will activate only when the
regularly because:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System vehicle is driven at speeds above
(TPMS) 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
may not detect a sudden drop in tire time.
WARNING pressure (for example a flat tire while ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
Radio waves could aversely effect driving). driven over potholes or other ob-
electric medical equipment. For additional information, refer to jects or if the vehicle strikes a
Those who use a pacemaker “Low tire pressure warning light” in curb while parking.
should contact the electric medi- the “Instruments and controls” sec-
cal equipment manufacturer for The tire pressures should be
the possible influences before tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
checked when the tires are cold. The
use. tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
tires are considered COLD after the
ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “In
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire vehicle has been parked for 3 or
case of emergency” section of this
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
manual.
It monitors tire pressure of all tires (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
except the spare. When the low tire Tire inflation pressure The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
pressure warning light is lit and the Check the tire pressures (including provides visual and audible signals
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning the spare) often and always prior to outside the vehicle for inflating tires
appears in the vehicle information long distance trips. The recom- to the recommended COLD tire
display, one or more of your tires is mended tire pressure specifications pressure. For additional information,
significantly under-inflated. If are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire
equipped, the system also displays certification label or the Tire and Alert” in the “Starting and driving”
pressure of all tires (except the spare Loading Information label under the section of this manual.
Do-it-yourself 8-27
Incorrect tire pressure, including ∙ Before taking a long trip, or
under inflation, may adversely af- whenever you heavily load your
fect tire life and vehicle handling. vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
WARNING pressures are at the specified
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail level.
suddenly and cause an ∙ For additional information re-
accident. garding tires, refer to “Impor-
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating tant Tire Safety Information”
(GVWR) is located on the (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
tion label. The vehicle weight mation Booklet.
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.

8-28 Do-it-yourself
 䊊
4 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
5 Spare tire size.
䊊
6 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-
hicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.

LDI2737
Tire and Loading Information 䊊
3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
label tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
䊊
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
ered COLD after the vehicle has
number of occupants that can
been parked for 3 or more hours,
be seated in the vehicle.
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
䊊
2 Original tire size: The size of the at moderate speeds. The rec-
tires originally installed on the ommended cold tire inflation is
vehicle at the factory. set by the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
 3. Remove the gauge. Size Cold Tire Inflation
4. Read the tire pressure on the Pressure
gauge stem and compare to the Front and Rear
specification shown on the Tire Original Tire: 33 psi, 230 kPa
and Loading Information label. 235/65R18
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If Front and Rear
too much air is added, press the Original Tire: 35 psi, 240 kPa
core of the valve stem briefly 235/55R20
with the tip of the gauge stem to Front and Rear
release pressure. Recheck the Original Tire: 36 psi, 250 kPa
pressure and add or release air 255/60R18
LDI0393 as needed. Spare Tire:
60 psi, 420 kPa
Checking tire pressure 6. Install the valve stem cap. T165/90D18
1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other
the tire. tires, including the spare.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, re-
position the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
 WDI0394 WDI0395
Example Example
TIRE LABELING 䊊
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This
Federal law requires tire manufac- 95H) number, known as the aspect
turers to place standardized infor- ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- height to width.
mation on the sidewall of all tires. signed for passenger vehicles
This information identifies and de- (not all tires have this informa- 4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
scribes the fundamental character- tion). 5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
istics of the tire and also provides the
2. Three-digit number (215): This ber is the wheel or rim diameter
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
number gives the width in milli- in inches.
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in meters of the tire from sidewall
case of a recall. edge to sidewall edge.

Do-it-yourself 8-31
 6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.

LDI2786
Example
䊊2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
XXX XXXX) (Optional).
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- 5. Four numbers represent the
partment Of Transportation”. week and year the tire was built.
The symbol can be placed For example, the numbers 3103
above, below or to the left or means the 31st week of 2003. If
right of the Tire Identification these numbers are missing then
Number. look on the other sidewall of the
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s tire.
identification mark.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
䊊
3 Tire ply composition and material Indicates whether the tire requires TYPES OF TIRES
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
The number of layers or plies of WARNING
(“tubeless”).
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate 䊊
7 The word “radial” ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
the materials in the tire, which in- The word “radial” is shown if the tire (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- has radial structure. construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
ers. able to help you with information
䊊
8 Manufacturer or brand name about tire type, size, speed rating and
䊊
4 Maximum permissible inflation
Manufacturer or brand name is
availability.
pressure ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
shown.
This number is the greatest amount speed rating than the factory
Other Tire-related Terminology equipped tires, and may not match
of air pressure that should be put in the potential maximum vehicle
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum In addition to the many terms that
speed. Never exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. are defined throughout this section, speed rating of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
䊊
5 Maximum load rating sidewall that contains a whitewall, ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
This number indicates the maxi- bears white lettering or bears the proper operation of the low tire
mum load in kilograms and pounds manufacturer, brand, and/or model pressure warning system.
that can be carried by the tire. When name molding that is higher or
replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
ways use a tire that has the same
the outward facing sidewall of an
load rating as the factory installed
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
tire. lar side that must always face out-
䊊
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” ward when mounted on a vehicle.

Do-it-yourself 8-33
∙ Always use tires of the same type, Summer tires states and Canadian provinces prohibit
size, brand, construction and tread their use. Check local, state and provincial
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some laws before installing studded tires. Skid
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to models to provide superior performance
do so may result in a circumference and traction capabilities of studded snow
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
difference between tires on the front
substantially reduced in snow and ice. than that of non-studded snow tires.
and rear axles which can cause the
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. TIRE CHAINS
injury or death, excessive tire wear If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
and may damage the transmission CAUTION
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
and differential gears. use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all Tire chains/cables should not be in-
∙ For additional information regarding four wheels. stalled on 235/55R20 or 255/60R18 size
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety tires. Installation of the tire
Snow tires chains/cables on 235/55R20 or
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to 255/60R18 size tires will cause damage
formation Booklet. select tires equivalent in size and load rat- to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do chains/cables, you should install
All season tires not, it can adversely affect the safety and 235/65R18 size tires on your vehicle.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some handling of your vehicle. Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
models to provide good performance all Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- cording to location. Check the local laws
year, including snowy and icy road condi- ings than factory equipped tires and may before installing tire chains. When installing
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL not match the potential maximum vehicle tire chains, make sure they are the proper
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. speed. Never exceed the maximum speed size for the tires on your vehicle and are
Snow tires have better snow traction than rating of the tire. installed according to the chain manufac-
All Season tires and may be more appropri- turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
ate in some areas. If you install snow tires, they must be the
chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
same size, brand, construction and tread
hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
pattern on all four wheels.
ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
For additional traction on icy roads, stud- are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. ances between the tire and the closest ve-
8-34 Do-it-yourself
hicle suspension or body component re- Wheel nut tightening torque:
quired to accommodate the use of a 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are de- The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
termined using the factory equipped tire ened to specifications at all times.
size. Other types may damage your vehicle. It is recommended that wheel nuts
Use chain tensioners when recommended be tightened to specification at
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain each tire rotation interval.
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage WARNING
to the fenders or underbody. If possible, ∙ After rotating the tires, check
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using and adjust the tire pressure.
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be WDI0258 ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
damaged and/or vehicle handling and the vehicle has been driven for
performance may be adversely affected. CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving Tire rotation cases of a flat tire, etc.).
with chains in such conditions can cause ∙ Do not include the spare tire in
damage to the various mechanisms of the NISSAN recommends rotating the the tire rotation.
vehicle due to some overstress. tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
∙ For additional information re-
For additional information on tire re- garding tires, refer to “Impor-
placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” tant Tire Safety Information”
in the “In case of emergency” section (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
of this manual. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
 ∙ The original tires have built-in Replacing wheels and tires
tread wear indicators. When the When replacing a tire, use the same size,
wear indicators are visible, the tread design, speed rating and load carry-
tire(s) should be replaced. ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-
∙ Tires degrade with age and use. ditional information, refer to “Wheels and
Have tires, including the spare, tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
over 6 years old checked by a mation” section of this manual.
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be WARNING
obvious. Replace the tires as ∙ The use of tires other than those rec-
necessary to prevent tire failure ommended or the mixed use of tires
and possible personal injury. of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
WDI0259 ∙ Improper service of the spare patterns can adversely affect the ride,
Tire wear and damage tire may result in serious per- braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
sonal injury. If it is necessary to Control (VDC) system, ground clear-
1. Wear indicator repair the spare tire, it is recom- ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
mended that you visit a NISSAN chain clearance, speedometer cali-
2. Location mark dealer for this service. bration, headlight aim and bumper
∙ For additional information re- height. Some of these effects may
WARNING lead to accidents and could result in
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
∙ Tires should be periodically in- serious personal injury.
tant Tire Safety Information”
spected for wear, cracking, (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
bulging or objects caught in the (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
tread. If excessive wear, cracks, mation Booklet.
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.

8-36 Do-it-yourself
∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was ∙ When replacing a wheel without the ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
originally equipped with four tires TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS wheel or tire even if it has been re-
that were the same size and you are will not function and the low tire pres- paired. Such wheels or tires could
only replacing two of the four tires, sure warning light will flash for ap- have structural damage and could fail
install the new tires on the rear axle. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- without warning.
Placing new tires on the front axle main on after 1 minute. Have your
∙ The use of retread tires is not
may cause loss of vehicle control in tires replaced and/or TPMS system
recommended.
some driving conditions and cause an reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
accident and personal injury. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ∙ For additional information regarding
for this service. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
son, always replace with wheels ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
which have the same off-set dimen- nally specified by NISSAN could affect
formation Booklet.
sion. Wheels of a different off-set the proper operation of the TPMS.
could cause premature tire wear, de- Four-wheel drive models
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
grade vehicle handling characteris-
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
when handling the TPMS sensor. CAUTION
terference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the Always use tires of the same type, size,
braking efficiency and/or early brake ID registration may be required. It is brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
pad wear. For additional information recommended that you visit a NISSAN or radial), and tread pattern on all four
on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to dealer for ID registration. wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical circumference difference between tires
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
and consumer information” section of on the front and rear axles which will
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
this manual. cause excessive tire wear and may
cap may become stuck.
damage the transmission, transfer case
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are and differential gears.
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.

Do-it-yourself 8-37
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- Care of wheels WARNING
mended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve- ∙ The spare tire should be used for
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and hicle to maintain their appearance. emergency use only. It should be re-
wheel alignment should also be checked placed with the standard tire at the
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
and corrected as necessary. It is recom- first opportunity to avoid possible tire
the wheel is changed or the underside
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for or differential damage.
of the vehicle is washed.
this service. ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
Wheel balance washing the wheels.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle sharp turns and abrupt braking while
handling and tire life. Even with regular use, ∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents driving.
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, or corrosion. Such damage may cause ∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
they should be balanced as required. loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire pressure. Always keep the pressure of
bead. the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
Wheel balance service should be per-
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
formed with the wheels off the vehicle. ∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle wheels to protect against road salt in ∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
could lead to mechanical damage. areas where it is used during winter. tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
∙ For additional information regarding Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY (80 km/h).
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- spare tire) ∙ When driving on roads covered with
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty When replacing a wheel without the TPMS snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
Information Booklet. such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
function.
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:

8-38 Do-it-yourself
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-39
MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Additional maintenance items for
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Explanation of general maintenance Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Maintenance under severe operating
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-6 Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle er’s service department can perform the
good mechanical condition, as well as its The maintenance items listed in this sec- service needed to meet the maintenance
emissions and engine performance. tion are required to be serviced at regular requirements on your vehicle.
intervals. However under severe driving
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required.
general maintenance, is performed.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service.
General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni-
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-
sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are completely qualified to
regularly as prescribed. work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-
Performing general maintenance checks gins.
requires minimal mechanical skill and only If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is
a few general automotive tools. recommended that you ask your NISSAN
These checks or inspections can be done dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you Collision Center is located, or go to
prefer, a NISSAN dealer. http://collision.nissanusa.com.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

During the normal day-to-day operation of secondary latch keeps the hood from Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-
the vehicle, general maintenance should opening when the primary latch is re- hicle should pull to either side while driving
be performed regularly as prescribed in leased. on a straight and level road, or if you detect
this section. If you detect any unusual uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
When driving in areas using road salt or be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
other corrosive materials, check lubrica- ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
check for the cause or have it checked
tion frequently. way speeds, wheel balancing may be
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular needed.
that repairs are required. basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop For additional information regarding tires,
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
When performing any checks or mainte- lights are all operating properly and in- (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. the Warranty Information Booklet.
nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are regular basis. Check the windshield at least
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL missing, and check for any loose wheel every six months for cracks or other dam-
MAINTENANCE ITEMS nuts. Tighten if necessary. age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev- by a qualified repair facility. It is recom-
Additional information on the following mended that you have a damaged wind-
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it- ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a
yourself ” section of this manual. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate
Outside the vehicle often and always prior to long distance a collision center in your area, refer to
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all http://collision.nissanusa.com.
The maintenance items listed here should tires, including the spare, to the pressure
be performed from time to time, unless specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
otherwise specified. or excessive wear. cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
doors and engine hood operate properly. transmitter components: Replace the
Also ensure that all latches lock securely. TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and cap when the tires are replaced due to
and links if necessary. Make sure that the wear or age.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Inside the vehicle the parking brake applied. If the parking Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
brake needs adjustment, it is recom- that the wipers and washer operate prop-
The maintenance items listed here should mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for erly and that the wipers do not streak.
be checked on a regular basis, such as this service.
when performing scheduled maintenance, Under the hood and vehicle
cleaning the vehicle, etc. Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to The maintenance items listed here should
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for be checked periodically (for example, each
ensure they operate smoothly and all
smooth operation and make sure the time you check the engine oil or refuel).
latches lock securely in every position.
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the Check that the head restraints/headrests Battery* (for maintenance free batter-
pedal. move up and down smoothly and the locks ies): This vehicle is equipped with a sealed
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched maintenance free battery. It is recom-
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth positions. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat service.
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly NOTE:
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
diately. It is recommended that you visit a and smoothly, and are installed securely. Care should be taken to avoid situations
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, that can lead to potential battery dis-
floor mat away from the pedal. wear or damage. charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
the vehicle to one side when applied. steering system, such as excessive free 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
play, hard steering or strange noises. tronic accessories that consume bat-
Continuously Variable Transmission
tery power when the engine is not
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held warning lights and chimes are operating
players, etc.).
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) properly.
position without applying any brakes. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
only driven short distances.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake comes out of the defroster outlets properly
operation regularly. The vehicle should be and in sufficient quantity when operating In these cases, the battery may need to
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the heater or air conditioner. be charged to maintain battery health.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
 EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause The following descriptions are provided to
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines and have it corrected immediately. give you a better understanding of the
on the reservoir. Power steering fluid level* and lines: scheduled maintenance items that should
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with be regularly checked or replaced. The
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
the engine off. Check the lines for proper maintenance schedule indicates at which
level when the engine is cold.
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. mileage/time intervals each item requires
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive service.
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, In addition to scheduled maintenance,
Engine oil level*: Check the level after leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. your vehicle requires that some items be
parking the vehicle on a level spot and Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- checked during normal day-to-day opera-
turning off the engine. Wait more than mation, rot or loose connections. tion. For additional information, refer to
15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the “General maintenance” in this section.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
oil pan. exposed to corrosive substances such as Items marked with “*” are recommended
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no those used on icy roads or to control dust. It by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the is very important to remove these sub- You are not required to perform mainte-
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or stances, otherwise rust may form on the nance on these items in order to maintain
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the the warranties which come with your
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It exhaust system. At the end of winter, the NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN underbody should be thoroughly flushed tervals are required.
with plain water, being careful to clean
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
those areas where mud and dirt may accu- When applicable, additional information
mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-
mulate. For additional information, refer to can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section the “Appearance and care” section of this of this manual.
of this manual. manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

NOTE: or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
additional information on the proper mix- Install new plugs of the same type as origi-
NISSAN does not advocate the use of nally equipped.
ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
ing systems and strongly advises CHASSIS AND BODY
this manual.)
against performing these services on a MAINTENANCE:
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- NOTE:
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
Mixing any other type of coolant or the proper installation. Check for chafing,
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
use of non-distilled water may reduce cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
the recommended service interval of the Replace any deteriorated or damaged
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, coolant. parts immediately.
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom- Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
ties” in the “Technical and consumer in- deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-
recommended oil grade and viscosity, refer
formation” section of this manual. ately.
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM capacities” in the “Technical and consumer Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
MAINTENANCE: information” section of this manual. haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for connections or replace parts as necessary.
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts. ance if necessary. In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- Evaporative emissions control vapor ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- more frequently.
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter ness. Tighten connections or replace parts
more frequently. as necessary. Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage,
looseness, and grease leakage.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
specified interval. When adding or replac- and connections for leaks, looseness, or
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine deterioration. Tighten connections or re-
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) place parts as necessary.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- ∙ Repeated short trips of less than
pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil nance schedules that may be used, de- tures remaining below freezing.
or grease. Under severe driving conditions, pending upon the conditions in which you ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
inspect more frequently. usually drive. These schedules contain and-go “rush hour” traffic.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-
most people, the odometer reading will in- ing for long distances, such as police,
structions under “Explanation of general
dicate when service is needed. However, if taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
maintenance items” in this section. When
rotating tires, check for damage and un- you drive very little, your vehicle should be ∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
even wear. Replace if necessary. serviced at the regular time intervals
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
shown in the schedule.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Vi- roads.
sually inspect for signs of leakage at speci- After 120,000 miles
fied intervals. ∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue a car-top carrier.
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top maintenance at the same mileage/time
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, intervals. NOTE:
replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS For vehicles operated in Canada, both
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect
the fluid deterioration data using a CON-
FOR SEVERE OPERATING standard and severe maintenance items
CONDITIONS should be performed at every interval.
SULT. If the deterioration data is more than
210000, replace the CVT fluid. Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
STANDARD MAINTENANCE

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be re-
quired. After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Engine oil filter Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

 MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)
Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Engine oil filter Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
Brake lines & cables I I I I I I
Brake pads & rotors夝 I I I I I I
Brake fluid夝 R R R
CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension I I I
parts夝
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod- I I I I I I
els)夝
Exhaust system夝 I I I
In-cabin microfilter R R R R
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

 MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)
Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
Brake lines and cables I I I I I I
Brake pads and rotors夝 I I I I I I
Brake fluid夝 R R R
CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension I I I
parts夝
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod- I I I I I I
els)夝
Exhaust system夝 I I I
In-cabin microfilter R R R R
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT
fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
preceding pages are for normal operating ing for long distance, such as police, taxi
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles or door-to-door delivery use.
under severe driving conditions as shown (8 km).
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
below, more frequent maintenance must ∙ Repeated short trips of less than
be performed on the following items as 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
shown in the table. tures remaining below freezing. roads.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- ∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
and-go “rush hour” traffic. a car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months 120 Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine oil and oil filter Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Air conditioner system refrigerant and Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
When traveling or registering in another Flat towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Vehicle identification number Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12 test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric US Imperial
Measure Measure Measure
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
Fuel 74 L 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal
this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20” (or equivalent) is
Engine oil* With oil filter recommended.
Drain and refill 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a syn-
change
* For additional thetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used.
information, refer to “En- Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other
gine oil” in the “Do-it- than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s/
yourself” section of this Without oil filter INFINITI’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional
4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt
manual. change information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in this section.
Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
9.8 L 2-5/8 gal 2-1/8 gal
with reservoir (blue) or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
(or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
— — — fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN
fluid
CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered un-
der NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-synthetic
API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 75W-90
Differential gear oil — — — • The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may
cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle
repairs.

10-2 Technical and consumer information

 Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric US Imperial
Measure Measure Measure
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid super GL-5 80W-90 or
Transfer fluid — — —
equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
• Use of power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — —
may prevent the power steering system from operating
properly.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent
Brake fluid — — — DOT 3
• Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Windshield-washer fluid 5L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal
Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system
refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PS or equivalent
Air conditioning system oil — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system
refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more ∙ U.S. government regulations require
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel tified by a small, square, orange and
Index) number (Research octane number containing more than 15% ethanol. black label with the common abbre-
Using a fuel containing more than 15% viation or the appropriate percentage
91).
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically for that region.
designed for a fuel containing more
CAUTION than 15% ethanol can adversely affect Gasoline specifications
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door the emission control devices and sys- NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system tems of the vehicle. Damage caused meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
or other damage can occur if E-85 is by such fuel is not covered by the specifications where it is available. Many of
used in vehicles that are not designed NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the automobile manufacturers developed
to run on E-85. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- this specification to improve emission con-
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
could adversely affect the emission manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using your service station manager if the gaso-
control system, and may also affect fuel containing MMT may adversely line meets the WWFC specifications.
the warranty coverage. affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
Reformulated gasoline
∙ Under no circumstances should a
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
leaded gasoline be used, because this
tent, so you may have to consult your formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
will damage the three-way catalyst.
gasoline retailer for more details. specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
Note that Federal and California laws sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
lated gasoline. formulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline containing oxygenates ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should orange and black label with the common
contain no more than 5% methanol abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It age for that region.
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl should also contain a suitable
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with amount of appropriate cosolvents
E–85 fuel
or without advertising their presence. and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
NISSAN does not recommend the use of erly formulated with appropriate co- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
fuels of which the oxygenate content and solvents and corrosion inhibitors, E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- such methanol blends may cause fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask system damage and/or vehicle per- hicle. U.S. government regulations require
your service station manager. formance problems. At this time, suf- fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
ficient data is not available to ensure tified by a small, square, orange and black
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, that all methanol blends are suitable label with the common abbreviation or the
please take the following precautions as for use in NISSAN vehicles. appropriate percentage for that region.
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system If any driveability problems such as engine Fuel containing MMT
damage. stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
recommended for unleaded gasoline. use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
Take care not to spill gasoline during re- adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cluding the emissions control system. Note
methanol blend is used, it should can cause paint damage. that while some fuel pumps label MMT
contain no more than 15% oxygenate. content, not all do, so you may have to
E–15 fuel
consult your gasoline retailer for more de-
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% tails.
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Aftermarket fuel additives Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
NISSAN does not recommend the use of which may cause excessive fuel consump-
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- tion or engine damage. If any of the above
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
booster, intake valve deposit removers, hicle checked. It is recommended that you
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol- However, now and then you may notice
vents or similar ingredients that can be light spark knock for a short time while
harmful to the fuel system and engine. accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
Octane rating tips greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
engine load.
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recom-
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

 Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
LTI2051 viscosity based on the temperatures at
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before
RECOMMENDATIONS American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
cation or International Lubricant Standard- ity other than that recommended could
Selecting the correct oil ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage.
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do
satisfactory engine life and performance. Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
not have the specified quality label should high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
For additional information, refer to “Recom- not be used as they could cause engine
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
damage. its equivalent for the reason described in
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to “Change intervals.”
improve fuel economy.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals For additional information, refer to the The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
“Maintenance and schedules” section of NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
The oil and oil filter change intervals for this manual. ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
your engine are based on the use of the not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
specified quality oils and filters. Using en- AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM government regulations require the recov-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- REFRIGERANT AND OIL ery and recycling of any refrigerant during
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil RECOMMENDATIONS automotive air conditioner system service.
and filter change intervals could reduce A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-
engine life. Damage to the engine caused The air conditioner system in your cians and equipment needed to recover
by improper maintenance or use of incor- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the and recycle your air conditioner system re-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, frigerant.
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle NISSAN A/C system oil Type DH-PS or the
Limited Warranty. exact equivalents. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
Your engine was filled with a high-quality CAUTION system.
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recom- The use of any other refrigerant or oil
mended change interval. Oil and filter may cause severe damage to the air
change intervals depend upon how you conditioning system and will require
use your vehicle. the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ towing a trailer
∙ stop and go commuting
10-8 Technical and consumer information
SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model VQ35DD
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
CVT in N (Neutral) position
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug FXE22HR-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheels Offset in (mm) Size Overall length
with front license plate bracket in (mm) 198.8 (5,049)
Alloy 1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J Overall width in (mm) 77.3 (1,963)
Overall height
Alloy 1.97 (50) 20 x 7.5J without roof rack in (mm) 69.5 (1,766)
Tires Size with roof rack in (mm) 70.6 (1,793)
with antenna in (mm) 75.3 (1,913)
All Season 235/65R18 Front and Rear Track in (mm) 65.7 (1,670)
Wheelbase in (mm) 114.2 (2,900)
All Season 255/60R18
Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
All Season 235/55R20 Gross axle weight rating S.S. certification label” on
Front lbs. (kg) the center pillar between
Spare tire Wheel size Tire size the driver’s side front and
Rear lbs. (kg)
rear doors.
Temporary spare - steel 18 x 4T T165/90D18

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 LTI2028
and regulations.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number)
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, prov- The VIN plate is located as shown. This The vehicle identification number is lo-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- number is the identification for your vehicle cated as shown.
tions may differ. and is used in the vehicle registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an- The VIN number is also available through
other country, state, province or district the center display screen. For additional
and registered, its modifications, trans- information, refer to the separate
portation and registration are the re- NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

 LTI2255 WTI0172 WTI0198
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL
The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL
shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as
cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown.
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI2251 WTI0173 LTI2241

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION To mount the front license plate, attach the
LABEL LABEL license plate bracket to the bumper fascia
at the location marks (small dimples) using
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- the two provided screws 䊊 A .
and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as
located as shown. shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
weight plus the combined weight limit, Total load capacity - maxi-
∙ It is extremely dangerous to of passengers and cargo. mum total weight limit specified
ride in a cargo area inside a ve- of the load (passengers and
hicle. In a collision, people riding ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
in these areas are more likely to cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
ing) - maximum total combined maximum combined weight of
be seriously injured or killed. weight of the unloaded vehicle, occupants and cargo that can be
∙ Do not allow people to ride in passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-
any area of your vehicle that is tongue load and any other op- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the
not equipped with seats and tional equipment. This informa-
seat belts. trailer tongue weight must be in-
tion is located on the cluded as part of the cargo load.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification This information is located on the
is in a seat and using a seat belt label. Tire and Loading Information la-
properly. bel.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
TERMS maximum weight (load) limit ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
It is important to familiarize yourself specified for the front or rear axle. weight of cargo, the subtracted
with the following terms before This information is located on the weight of occupants from the
loading your vehicle: F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification load limit.
label.
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight in- ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
cluding: standard and optional rating) - The maximum total
equipment, fluids, emergency weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
tools, and spare tire assembly. sengers, cargo, and trailer.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.

LTI2320
Example
Technical and consumer information 10-15
Steps for determining correct 5. Determine the combined weight
load limit of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
1. Locate the statement “The com- weight may not safely exceed
bined weight of occupants and the available cargo and luggage
cargo should never exceed XXX load capacity calculated in
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s step 4.
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers Consult this manual to deter-
that will be riding in your vehicle. mine how this reduces the avail-
LIC3684
3. Subtract the combined weight able cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity of your vehicle. Cargo area luggage hooks
of the driver and passengers
SECURING THE LOAD
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg. Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the There are luggage hooks located in the
4. The resulting figure equals the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be
available amount of cargo and GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to used to secure cargo with ropes or other
luggage load capacity. For ex- types of straps.
ample, if the XXX amount equals “Measurement of weights” in this
section. When securing items using luggage
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
hooks located on the side finisher do not
150 lbs. passengers in your ve- Also check tires for proper inflation apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N)
hicle, the amount of available pressures. For additional informa- to a single hook.
cargo and luggage load capac- tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself” The luggage hooks that are located on
the floor should have loads less than
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = section of this manual.
110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
300 kg.)
10-16 Technical and consumer information
 WARNING LOADING TIPS ∙ Overloading not only can
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or ∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR shorten the life of your vehicle
straps to help prevent it from sliding and the tire, but can also cause
or GAWR as specified on the unsafe vehicle handling and
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop longer braking distances. This
or collision, unsecured cargo could label. may cause a premature tire fail-
cause personal injury. ure which could result in a seri-
∙ Do not load the front and rear ous accident and personal in-
∙ The child restraint top tether strap axle to the GAWR. Doing so will jury. Failures caused by
may be damaged by contact with exceed the GVWR. overloading are not covered by
items in the cargo area. Secure any the vehicle’s warranty.
items in the cargo area. Your child
WARNING
could be seriously injured or killed in a MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
collision if the top tether strap is ∙ Properly secure all cargo with Secure loose items to prevent
damaged. ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not weight shifts that could affect the
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier balance of your vehicle. When the ve-
than the GVWR or the maximum front place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage collision, unsecured cargo could weigh the front and the rear wheels
could occur, or it can change the way cause personal injury. separately to determine axle loads.
your vehicle handles. This could result Individual axle loads should not ex-
∙ Do not load your vehicle any ceed either of the gross axle weight
in loss of control and cause personal
heavier than the GVWR or the
injury.
maximum front and rear ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle can break, tire damage vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These
could occur, or it can change the ratings are given on the vehicle cer-
way your vehicle handles. This tification label. If weight ratings are
could result in loss of control exceeded, move or remove items to
and cause personal injury. bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at
Overloading or improper loading of a www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect information on trailer towing capability and
vehicle handling, braking and perfor- the special equipment required for proper
mance and may lead to accidents. towing.

CAUTION MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy Maximum trailer loads
load for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
Your engine, axle or other parts could
the value specified in the following Towing
be damaged.
Load/Specification Chart found in this sec-
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that tion. The total trailer load equals trailer
you tow a trailer, do not drive over weight plus its cargo weight. LTI2041
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make
∙ When towing a trailer load of The GCWR equals the combined weight of
starts at full throttle. This helps the
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers the towing vehicle (including passengers
engine and other parts of your vehicle
with a brake system MUST be used. and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-
wear in at the heavier loads.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight ing loads greater than these or using im-
Your new vehicle was designed to be used proper towing equipment could adversely
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
specified in the following Towing
Remember that towing a trailer places ad- mance.
Load/Specification Chart.
ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other sys- The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
tems. not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect CAUTION
towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded Vehicle damage resulting from im-
roads can affect engine performance and proper towing procedures is not cov-
cause overheating. The engine protection ered by NISSAN warranties.
mode, which helps reduce the chance of
engine damage, could activate and auto-
matically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced en- WTI0160
gine power and vehicle speed. The re-
duced speed may be lower than other
Tongue load
traffic, which could increase the chance When using a weight carrying or a weight
of a collision. Be especially careful when distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-
driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
safe driving speed, pull to the side of the the trailer tongue load specified by the
road in a safe area. Allow the engine to trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
cool and return to normal operation. For must be within the maximum tongue load
additional information, refer to “If your limits shown in the following “Towing
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
emergency” section of this manual. load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

 Towing capacities are calculated assum- 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
ing a base vehicle with driver and any op- the GVWR. The remaining amount is
tions required to achieve the rating. Addi- the available maximum tongue/king
tional passengers, cargo and/or optional pin load.
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will To determine the available towing capacity,
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your use the following procedure.
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
trailer tongue load. 1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing Load/Specification" chart
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed found in this section.
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
from the GCWR. The remaining amount
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
is the available maximum towing ca-
All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea- pacity.
LTI2042
sured using platform type scales com- To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight monly found at truck stops, highway weigh weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle stations, building supply centers or salvage ment and cargo, that are normally in the
Weight (GAW) yards. trailer when it is towed. Make sure the
To determine the available payload capac- Gross trailer weight is not more than the
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-
trailer and is not more than the calculated
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. ing procedure.
available maximum towing capacity.
certification label. The GVW equals the 1. Locate the GVWR on the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
addition, front or rear GAW must not ex- of the passengers and cargo that are
ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) normally in the vehicle when towing a
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- trailer.
tion label.
10-20 Technical and consumer information
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) GVWR “Towing load/specification” chart even if
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle the calculated available tongue weight is
– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and = 900 lbs. (409 kg) Available for tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
Rear Gross Axle Weight on the weight trailer weight to match the available
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The tongue weight.
cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg) GCWR Always verify that available capacities are
be moved or removed to meet the speci- within the required ratings.
fied ratings. – 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW
= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
Example:
towing
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed WARNING
on a scale - including passengers, cargo The towing capacities provided in this
900 lbs. (409 kg) Available tongue
and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg). manual are for general reference only.
weight
The safe towing capacity of your vehicle
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) / 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) Available capacity is affected by dealer and factory in-
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
= 10 % tongue weight stalled options and passenger and
bel - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg). cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle
∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) The available towing capacity may be less and trailer as described in this manual
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart than the maximum towing capacity due to to determine the actual vehicle towing
- 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg). the passenger and cargo load in the ve- capacity. Do not exceed the published
hicle. maximum towing capacity or the GCWR
∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from or the GVWR shown on the
“Towing Load/Specification" chart - Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-
9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg). between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or sult in an accident causing serious per-
within the trailer tongue load specification sonal injury or property damage.
recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
If the tongue load becomes excessive, re-
arrange the cargo to obtain the proper
tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum
tongue weight specification shown in the
Technical and consumer information 10-21
 TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART TOWING SAFETY
U.S. and Canada Trailer hitch
Maximum Towing Capacity*1 6,000 lbs. (2,721 kg)
Maximum Tongue Load 600 lbs. (272 kg) Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 11,000 lbs. (4,990 kg) tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options re- package includes a receiver-type frame
quired to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity. maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and
hitch balls are available from a NISSAN
dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-
tional trailer tow package, check the tow-
ing capacity of your bumper hitch or
receiver-type frame mounted hitch.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or
property damage due to sway caused by
crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-
ing trucks.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

 WARNING ∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball weight transferred through the frame and
must be long enough to be properly pushing down on the front wheels. This
Trailer hitch components have specific secured to the ball mount. There should gives stability to the tow vehicle.
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- be at least 2 threads showing beyond
pable of towing a trailer heavier than A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
the lock washer and nut.
the weight rating of the hitch compo- IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-
nents. Never exceed the weight rating Ball mount ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
of the hitch components. Doing so can (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
cause serious personal injury or prop- The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount equipment manufacturers to determine if
erty damage. and the ball mount is inserted into the they recommend the use of a weight-
hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball distributing hitch system.
Hitch ball mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-
tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to NOTE:
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
keep the trailer tongue level with the
weight rating for your trailer: A weight-distributing hitch system may
ground.
∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped affect the operation of trailer surge
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
Weight carrying hitches brakes. If you are considering use of a
balls also have the size printed on the weight-distributing hitch system with a
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
top of the ball. mount is one that is designed to carry the surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
whole amount of tongue weight and gross the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-
∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball turer to determine if and how this can be
weight directly on the ball mount and on
based on the trailer weight. the receiver. done.
∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of Follow the instructions provided by the
Weight distribution hitch
the hitch ball must be matched to the manufacturer for installing and using the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball This type of hitch is also called a “load- weight-distributing hitch system.
shank should be no more than 1/16” leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
General set-up instructions are as follows:
smaller than the hole in the ball mount. attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t face. With the ignition on and the doors
carry the full tongue weight of a given closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
trailer, and need some of the tongue several minutes so that it can level.
Technical and consumer information 10-23
 2. Measure the height of a reference point control device will work with the vehicle, hitch should be used to tow trailers that
on the front and rear bumpers at the hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
center of the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
manufacturer for installing and using the
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad- trailer hitch equipment that has a
just the hitch equalizers so that the sway control device.
10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rat-
front bumper height is within 0 - Class I hitch ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-
.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference ing the maximum trailer weights shown in
height measured in step 2. The rear Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in
bumper should be no higher than the mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow this section.
reference height measured in step 2. trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg). CAUTION
WARNING
Class II hitch ∙ Special hitches which include frame
Properly adjust the weight distributing reinforcements are required for tow-
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable
higher than the measured reference ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts
height when the trailer is attached. If tow trailers of a maximum weight of and hitch balls for pickup trucks and
the rear bumper is higher than the mea- 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg). sport utility vehicles are available at a
sured reference height when loaded, NISSAN dealer.
the vehicle may handle unpredictably Class III hitch
which could cause a loss of vehicle con- ∙ The hitch should not be attached to or
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, affect the operation of the impact-
trol and cause serious personal injury or
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to absorbing bumper.
property damage.
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
Sway control device 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). WARNING
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf- Class IV hitch ∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
feting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices may Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
be used to help control these affects. If you ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to system, brake system, etc. to install a
choose to use one, contact a reputable tow trailers of a maximum weight of trailer hitch.
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing
10-24 Technical and consumer information
∙ To reduce the possibility of additional mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-
damage if your vehicle is struck from enough slack in the chains to permit turn- nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat
the rear, where practical, remove the ing corners. 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed
receiver when not in use. to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.
Trailer lights Adapters are available at auto parts stores
∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch and hitch retailers.
mounting bolts are securely CAUTION
mounted.
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
Trailer brakes
Tire pressures system, a commercially available When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
power-type module/converter must be (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the used to provide power for all trailer system MUST be used. However, most
vehicle tires to the recom- lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat- states require a separate braking system
mended cold tire pressure indi- tery as a direct power source for all on trailers with a loaded weight above a
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
cated on the Tire and Loading In- specific amount. Make sure the trailer
light, stop light and turn signal circuits
formation label. meets the local regulations and the regu-
as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more lations where you plan to tow.
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat- that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail Several types of braking systems are avail-
ing and proper inflation pressure lamp circuits. Using a able.
should be in accordance with the module/converter that exceeds these
power requirements may damage the Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is
trailer and tire manufacturer’s
vehicle’s electrical system. See a repu- mounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-
specifications. draulic line running to each trailer wheel.
table trailer retailer to obtain the proper
Safety chains equipment and to have it installed. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer
pushing against the hitch ball when the
Always use suitable safety chains between Trailer lights should comply with federal tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety and/or local regulations. For assistance in brakes are common on rental trailers and
chains should be crossed and should be hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended some boat trailers. In this type of system,
attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle that you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu- there is no hydraulic or electric connection
bumper or axle. The safety chains can be table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with for brake operation between the tow ve-
attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is the optional trailer tow package are hicle and the trailer.
Technical and consumer information 10-25
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking To install the electric trailer brake controller
systems are activated by an electronic sig- jumper harness, perform the following pro-
nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe- cedure:
cial brake-sensing module). For additional
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to
information, refer to “Electric trailer brake
the rearmost position.
controller” in this section.
Have a professional supplier of towing
equipment make sure the trailer brakes are
properly installed and demonstrate proper
brake function testing.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system. LTI0117
Jumper Harness
Electric trailer brake controller (if
so equipped)
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may
require the installation of an aftermarket
trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a con-
nector and jumper harness that is specifi-
cally designed to be used when installing
an aftermarket brake controller.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

 WIRE COLOR NOTE
RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp
switch to trailer brake
controller.
BLACK Brake controller
ground (-).
BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller
switched output.
RED/BLUE Not used
RED Fused trailer brake
controller battery feed
(B+).

3. Peel off the tape and connect the

LTI2045 LTI2046 jumper harness to the connector.
Connector Location Connector 4. Release the parking brake.
2. Locate the jumper harness connector
5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer
under the lower portion of the instru-
ment panel. The connector is taped to brake controller according to the
the wiring harness 䊊
1 as indicated. manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ The connector is marked with a white Pre-towing tips

tag with “elec brake conn”.
∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
Wire color designation for electric trailer position when a loaded and/or un-
brake controller jumper harness. loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or
nose-down condition; check for im-
proper tongue load, overload, worn sus-
pension or other possible causes of ei-
ther condition.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

 ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre- bility and braking performance will be CAUTION
vent load shift while driving. somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions. If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)
∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible position before blocking the wheels
in the trailer to keep the trailer center of ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre- and applying the parking brake, trans-
gravity low. vent load shift while driving. mission damage could occur.
∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60% ∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
of the trailer load is in the front half and or lock to prevent the coupler from in-
40% is in the back half. Also make sure advertently becoming unlatched. 2. Have someone place blocks on the
the load is balanced side to side. downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or wheels.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, stops.
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera- 3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. slowly release the brake pedal until the
tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. ∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate blocks absorb the vehicle load.
speed. 4. Apply the parking brake.
∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-
form to all federal, state or local regula- ∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
tions. If not, install any mirrors required the steering wheel with one hand. Move
for towing before driving the vehicle. your hand in the direction in which you 6. Turn off the engine.
want the trailer to go. Make small cor- To drive away:
∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-
rections and back up slowly. If possible,
hicle and trailer so the required clear- 1. Start the vehicle.
have someone guide you when you are
ance is known.
backing up. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
Trailer towing tips Always block the wheels on both vehicle 3. Shift the transmission into gear.
In order to gain skill and an understanding and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if you 4. Release the parking brake.
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-
tice turning, stopping and backing up in an must do so: 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
area which is free from traffic. Steering sta- are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
10-28 Technical and consumer information
7. Have someone retrieve and store the ∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often 2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-
blocks. than at intervals specified in the recom- ply the brakes and pull to the side of the
mended Maintenance Schedule in the road in a safe area.
∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may 3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
this manual.
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to balanced. For additional information,
maintain adequate control, reduce your ∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid will be closer to the inside of the turn
∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.
long or repeated use of the brakes than your vehicle wheels. To compen-
Passing while towing a trailer requires
when descending a hill, as this reduces sate for this, make a larger than normal
considerably more distance than nor-
their effectiveness and could cause turning radius during the turn.
mal passing. Remember, the length of
overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- the trailer must also pass the other ve-
stead provides “engine braking” and re-
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, hicle before you can safely change
duces the need to brake as frequently.
possibly causing vehicle sway. When lanes.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises being passed by larger vehicles, be pre-
∙ Use the Tow Mode or downshift the
to a high temperature, refer to “If your pared for possible changes in cross-
transmission to a lower gear for engine
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of winds that could affect vehicle han-
braking when driving down steep or
emergency” section of this manual. dling.
long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than Do the following if the trailer begins to without applying the brakes.
normal circumstances. sway:
∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal long or too frequently. This could cause
first 500 miles (805 km). to allow the vehicle to coast and steer the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-
as straight ahead as the road condi- duced braking efficiency.
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tions allow. This combination will help
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph ∙ Increase your following distance to al-
stabilize the vehicle.
(80 km/h). low for greater stopping distances
– Do not correct trailer sway by steer- while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
ing or applying the brakes. and brake gradually.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

 ∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise vate tow mode. The indicator light on the FLAT TOWING FOR 4–WHEEL DRIVE
control not be used while towing a TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow VEHICLE (if so equipped)
trailer. mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE
switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
∙ Some states or provinces have specific mode is automatically canceled when the the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
regulations and speed limits for ve- ignition switch is turned off. This method is sometimes used when
hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
local speed limits. Tow mode includes the following features: hicle, such as a motor home.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness ∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmission
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a CAUTION
load up a grade. ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break. ∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto- result in severe transmission damage.
matically downshifts when driving ∙ Never flat tow your 4-wheel drive
∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the down a grade with a trailer or heavy
water level to go over the exhaust tail (4WD) vehicle.
load to help control vehicle speed.
pipe or rear bumper. ∙ DO NOT tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD)
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no vehicle with any wheels on the
∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not
lights before backing the trailer into the ground. Doing so may cause serious
cause any damage. However, fuel and expensive damage to the
water or the trailer lights may burn out. economy may be reduced and the powertrain.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil transmission/engine driving characteris-
should be replaced and transmission tics may feel unusual. ∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
oil/fluid should be changed more fre- fer to “Towing recommended by
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
quently. For additional information, refer should be replaced and transmission
to the “Do-it-yourself” section in this section of this manual.
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
manual. quently. For additional information, refer
Tow mode to the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
Using tow mode is recommended when
pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy
load. Press the TOW MODE switch to acti-
10-30 Technical and consumer information
 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL ∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped) ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
fer to “Towing recommended by
conform to federal safety requirements in
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on addition to these grades.
section of this manual.
the ground is sometimes called flat towing. Quality grades can be found where appli-
This method is sometimes used when Continuously Variable cable on the tire sidewall between tread
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- Transmission shoulder and maximum section width. For
hicle, such as a motor home. example:
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
CAUTION ously variable transmission, an appropriate Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the A
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
result in severe transmission damage. the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda- Treadwear
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- tions when using their product. The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ways tow forward, never backward. ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve- specified government test course. For ex-
hicle with the front tires on the ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
ground. Doing so may cause serious and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
and expensive damage to the government course as a tire graded 100.
powertrain. The relative performance of tires depends
∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive upon the actual conditions of their use,
continuously variable transmission however, and may depart significantly from
vehicle with all four wheels on the the norm due to variations in driving habits,
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL service practices and differences in road
DAMAGE internal transmission parts characteristics and climate.
due to lack of transmission
lubrication.

Technical and consumer information 10-31

 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY

Traction AA, A, B and C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-
B and A represent higher levels of perfor- lowing emission warranties:
The traction grades, from highest to low- mance on the laboratory test wheel than
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- For USA
the minimum required by law.
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- 1. Emission Defects Warranty
ment as measured under controlled WARNING
conditions on specified government test 2. Emissions Performance Warranty
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire The temperature grade for this tire is
Details of this warranty may be found with
marked C may have poor traction perfor- established for a tire that is properly in-
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
mance. flated and not overloaded. Excessive
formation Booklet which comes with your
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
WARNING loading, either separately or in combi-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
nation, can cause heat build-up and
The traction grade assigned to this tire may obtain a replacement by writing to:
possible tire failure.
is based on straight-ahead braking ∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
traction tests, and does not include ac- Consumer Affairs Department
celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or P.O. Box 685003
peak traction characteristics. Franklin, TN 37068-5003
Temperature A, B and C For Canada
The temperature grades are A (the high- Emission Control System Warranty
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat, and its Details of this warranty may be found with
ability to dissipate heat when tested under other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor formation Booklet which comes with your
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
perature can cause the material of the tire ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- may obtain a replacement by writing to:
cessive temperature can lead to sudden ∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a 5290 Orbitor Drive
level of performance which all passenger Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
10-32 Technical and consumer information
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA You may notify NISSAN by contact- You may contact Transport Canada’s
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-
If you believe that your vehicle has a
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
defect which could cause a crash or may also report safety defects online
could cause injury or death, you For Canada
at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
should immediately inform the Na- If you believe that your vehicle has a Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- defect which could cause a crash or fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speak-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- could cause injury or death, you ers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
fying NISSAN. should immediately inform Trans- Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, port Canada in addition to notifying cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
it may open an investigation, and if it NISSAN.
Additional information concerning
finds that a safety defect exists in a If Transport Canada receives com- motor vehicle safety may be obtained
group of vehicles, it may order a re- plaints, it may open an investigation, from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
call and remedy campaign. However, and if it finds that a safety defect Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
NHTSA cannot become involved in exists in a group of vehicles, it may or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
individual problems between you, request that NISSAN conduct a recall (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/
your dealer, or NISSAN. campaign. However, Transport securiteroutiere (French speakers).
Canada cannot become involved in
To contact NHTSA, you may call the To notify NISSAN of any safety con-
individual problems between you,
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at cerns please contact our Consumer
your dealer, or NISSAN.
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- Information Centre toll free at 1-800-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; 387-0122.
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other in-
formation about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Technical and consumer information 10-33
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

WARNING If a powertrain system component is re- This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
paired or the battery is disconnected, the Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
Drive (4WD) should never be tested us- tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the crash-like situations, such as an air bag
ing a two wheel dynamometer (such as vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
the dynamometers used by some readiness condition. Place the ignition that will assist in understanding how a ve-
states for emissions testing), or similar switch in the ON position without starting hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-
equipment. Make sure you inform the the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator signed to record data related to vehicle dy-
test facility personnel that your vehicle Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds namics and safety systems for a short
is equipped with 4WD before it is placed and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
test equipment may result in transmis- blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- cord such data as:
sion damage or unexpected vehicle tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
movement which could result in serious ∙ How various systems in your vehicle
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
vehicle damage or personal injury. were operating;
dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
Due to legal requirements in some states ∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
be required to be in what is called the ∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
“ready condition” for an ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the and,
emission control system.
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving ∙ Sounds are not recorded.
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-
hicle.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

 OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

These data can help provide a better un- Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
derstanding of the circumstances in which model year and prior can be purchased. A
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- source of service and repair information for
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are your vehicle. This manual is the same one
recorded by the EDR under normal driving used by the factory-trained technicians
conditions and no personal data (e.g. working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
name, gender, age and crash location) are NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-
recorded. However, other parties, such as chased.
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
For USA
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash in- For current pricing and availability of Genu-
vestigation. ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special www.nissan-techinfo.com
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to For current pricing and availability of Genu-
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- 1-800-247-5321
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to For Canada
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
accessed with the consent of the vehicle Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or model year and prior, please contact your
permitted by law. nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-35

MEMO

10-36 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . .1-9 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Automatic Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-73
Automatic drive positioner. . . .3-48, 3-51 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
A Automatic power window switch. . .2-66 Brightness control
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-46 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Air bag (See supplemental restraint Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-11
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Automatic drive positioner. . . . . .3-48, 3-51 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Air bag system Automatic Emergency Braking
Front (See supplemental front impact air (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 5-58
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60 C
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 B Capacities and recommended fuel/
Air bag warning light, lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80, 8-13 Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Cargo
Air conditioner Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 (See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-14
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-33 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-22 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-15 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-27, 1-28, 1-30, 1-32
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-22 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Heater and air conditioner Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Brake Precautions on child
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-40 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-73 restraints . . . . . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49
Alarm system Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Top tether strap anchor point
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-33 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25 locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-73 Child restraint with top tether strap . . .1-34
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-19, 8-19 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-19
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-12 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-21 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-73 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Climate-controlled seat switches. . . . .2-44
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-74 C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .10-12
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Driving with Continuously Variable Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Precautions when starting and Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6
Continuously Variable Transmission driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2
Continuously Variable Transmission Dual panel moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-3
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Dual power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Explanation of scheduled maintenance
Driving with Continuously Variable items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Controls E Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-33
Coolant E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Capacities and recommended Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67 F
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-13, 6-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Flashers
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-32 (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Engine Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41, 5-41 Capacities and recommended Fluid
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Capacities and recommended
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
D Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . . .2-41 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Defroster switch Engine compartment check Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Rear window and outside mirror locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-11
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-42 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Engine oil and oil filter Front air bag system
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-60
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-48, 3-51 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Driving Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

11-2
Fuel Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-39 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-42
Capacities and recommended Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . . .4-11
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-43
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-39 Heated 2nd row seat switches . . . . . . .2-46 Intelligent Key system
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Key operating range . . . . . . . . .3-9, 3-22
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Heated steering wheel switch . . . .2-47, 2-48 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-30 Heater Remote keyless entry
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-66 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-33 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14, 3-22
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . .3-18, 3-27
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-49 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-27
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . .5-78 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-76, 2-77
G Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 J
Hook
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-14
Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-76, 2-77 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Gauge K
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 I
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Ignition switch Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-11 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14 Keyless entry
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 With Intelligent Key system
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 (See Intelligent Key system) . . . .3-14, 3-22
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-67 Keys
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Indicator lights and audible reminders NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . .3-2, 3-21
(See warning/indicator lights and audible NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16 keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
H Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-46
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-42
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
11-3
 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
L Low windshield-washer fluid warning Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Labels Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-63 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Maintenance under severe operation
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-18 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Emission control information label . .10-12 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-72 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Warning/indicator lights and audible Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11 Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48, 3-51
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Vehicle identification number (VIN) Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Lock
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-42
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71 Mirror
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . .3-46
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . .2-41 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
License plate Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-13 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15, 2-29
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68, 7-5
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-13
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-27
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
Light light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 N
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-64
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-11 Luggage NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-21
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25 M
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Maintenance O
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-39 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-39 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-27
11-4
Oil Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54, 2-55 Recorders
Capacities and recommended Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-72 Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-8
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Precautions Registering a vehicle in another
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 On-pavement and off-road driving Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-29, 5-16
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-33
Engine oil and oil filter Precautions on booster Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Precautions on child S
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47 restraints . . . . . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49
Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-60 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-18 Safety
Overheat Precautions on supplemental restraint Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Child seat belts. . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-35 Precautions when starting and Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-33
Owner's manual/service manual order driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Seat adjustment
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-5
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
P R
Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . .1-9
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Parking Radio
Seat belt
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-21 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-72 Readiness for inspection maintenance
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-28
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-32
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Power Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-50
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-18
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Rear Sonar System (RSS). . . . . . . . . . .5-79
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54, 2-55 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 7-7
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Rear window and outside mirror defroster
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-21
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-72 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Rear window wiper and washer
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-21, 2-15
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
11-5
Seats Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-72 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . .1-9 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-48, 3-51 Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 T
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Temperature gauge
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68, 7-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-71 engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14
Security systems Supplemental air bag warning Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-33 light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 Tire
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Supplemental front impact air bag Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-35 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-38
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 Supplemental restraint system Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13
Sonar Information and warning labels . . . . .1-71 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-79 Precautions on supplemental restraint Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Supplemental restraint system Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-53 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Switch Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-31
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Automatic power window switch . . .2-66 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Tire pressure
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13
Starting Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-39 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-39 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-34
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-14 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . .2-49 Towing
Precautions when starting and Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-42 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-21
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Rear window and outside mirror Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Steering Rear window wiper and washer Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
11-6
Transceiver Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
HomeLink® Universal Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Transceiver . . . . . . .2-73, 2-74, 2-76, 2-77 Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-34, 5-14 Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Transmission Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Washer switch
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Rear window wiper and washer
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Driving with Continuously Variable Weights
W (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-10
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-10
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another Warning Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 When traveling or registering in another
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-12 country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-65
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
U Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-30 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-15, 2-29 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-31 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-40 Low windshield-washer fluid warning Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Wiper
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-63 Rear window wiper and washer
V
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-21, 2-15 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Supplemental air bag warning Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-16 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-33
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Warning/indicator lights and audible
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-75
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11
Warning/indicator lights and audible
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Vehicle immobilizer system. . . . . .2-34, 5-14
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-14
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
11-7
GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In- manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using label.
dex) number (Research octane number 91). fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve- The label is typically located on the driver
CAUTION hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- additional information, refer to “Wheels and
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system tent, so you may have to consult your tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
or other damage can occur if E-85 is gasoline retailer for more details. manual.
used in vehicles that are not designed Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
to run on E-85.
lated gasoline. BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission ∙ U.S. government regulations require During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
control system, and may also affect ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
the warranty coverage. tified by a small, square, orange and recommendations for the future reliability
∙ Under no circumstances should a black label with the common abbre- and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
leaded gasoline be used, because this viation or the appropriate percentage ditional information, refer to “Break-in
will damage the three-way catalyst. for that region. schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual. Failure to follow these
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more For additional information, refer to “Recom- recommendations may result in vehicle
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage or shortened engine life.
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel in the “Technical and consumer informa-
containing more than 15% ethanol. tion” section of this manual.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect Refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
the emission control devices and sys- and capacities” in the “Technical and con-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused sumer information” section of this manual.
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Printing : March 2019
Publication No.: OM19EA 0R52U1
Printed in the U.S.A. R52-D